You are on page 1of 413

07/09/12 09:10:57 32SAA650_001

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle, and should remain with the vehicle when it
is sold.

This Owners Manual covers all models of the Jazz. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not
on your particular model.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Although this manual is applicable to both right-hand and left-hand drive models, the illustrations contained in this
manual mainly refer to the left-hand drive models.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:05 32SAA650_002

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a Honda Jazz was a wise investment. It As you read this manual, you will
will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
(On German type)
Several other booklets explain the warranties that protect your new vehicle. 1. Mounting the front licence plate:
Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and Mount the front licence plate to
are aware of your rights and responsibilities. the provided holder taking care
that the upper edge of the licence
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual or plate does not project above the
the separate service information booklet helps to keep your driving trouble- upper surface of the bumper.
free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs
maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in 2. Mounting the rear licence plate:
servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated Mount the rear licence plate to the
to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and back of the vehicle so that its
concerns. lower edge is flush with the lower
end of the surface provided for
Best wishes and happy motoring. mounting.

Symbols on labels attached to your vehicle are to remind you to


read this owners manual for proper and safe operation of your vehicle.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:16 32SAA650_003

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, includ-
is very important. And operating this ing:
vehicle safely is an important respon-
sibility. Safety Labels on the vehicle.
Safety Messages preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed deci- three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
sions about safety, we have provided These signal words mean:
operating procedures and other infor-
mation on labels and in this manual. You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
This information alerts you to poten- HURT if you dont follow instructions.
tial hazards that could hurt you or
others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you dont follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or possi-
ble to warn you about all the hazards You CAN be HURT if you dont follow
associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.

ii

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:29 32SAA650_004

Contents
Turn to the beginning of each section for a complete list of subjects.
Your Vehicle at a Glance........... 2 Before Driving .................... 229 Appearance Care ................. 345
What petrol to use, how to break- Tips on cleaning and protecting
Driver and Passenger Safety ..... 7 in your new vehicle, and how to your vehicle.
Important information about the load luggage and other cargo.
proper use and care of your Taking Care of the
vehicles seat belts, an overview of Driving ............................... 245 Unexpected ........................ 353
the supplemental restraint system, The proper way to start the engine, This section covers several
and valuable information on how shift the transmission, and park; problems motorists sometimes
to protect children with child plus what you need to know if experience, and details how to
restraints. youre planning to tow a trailer. handle them.

Instruments and Controls ...... 83 Maintenance ....................... 277 Technical Information.......... 385
Explains the purpose of each The maintenance schedule shows ID numbers, dimensions, capaci-
instrument panel indicator and you when you need to take your ties, and technical information.
gauge, and how to use the controls vehicle to the dealer. There is also
on the dashboard and steering a list of things to check and Index ................................. 397
column. instructions on how to check them.

Comfort and Convenience


Features ............................. 147
How to operate the heating and air
conditioning system/climate
control system, the audio system,
and other convenience features.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:35 32SAA650_005

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS


DRIVERS FRONT INDICATOR LIGHTS
AIRBAG(P.12, 73) (P.86) (P.148)
GAUGES (P.96) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
REMOTE (P.157)
AUDIO
CONTROLS PASSENGERS
(P.226) FRONT AIRBAG
(P.12, 73)

MASTER
DOOR LOCK
BUTTON
(P.115)

POWER WINDOW AUDIO SYSTEM


SWITCHES (P.167)
(P.134)

BONNET RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.233)

PARKING BRAKE MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P.248)


: For some types (P.140) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.251)
A/T model is shown.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:43 32SAA650_006

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Left-hand drive type


HORN PAD1 INSTRUMENT PANEL HAZARD WARNING BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEMISTER
BRIGHTNESS2 (P.106) (P.106)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (P.103) HEATED DOOR MIRRORS2
(VSA) OFF SWITCH2 (P.265) (P.138)
FOG LIGHTS2
(P.107/108)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.102/103)

MIRROR CONTROLS2
(P.138)

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER2 STEERING SHIFT


(P.109) SWITCHES2 (P.256)

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH2 WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS


(P.110) (P.255) (P.104/105)

1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2 : For some types
3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:49 32SAA650_007

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type


HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS (P.148) INDICATOR LIGHTS (P.86) DRIVERS FRONT
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.157) GAUGES(P.96) AIRBAG
(P.12, 73)
REMOTE AUDIO
PASSENGERS CONTROLS
FRONT AIRBAG (P.226)
(P.12, 73) MASTER DOOR LOCK
BUTTON
(P.115)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.134)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.167)

BONNET RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.233)

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.248) PARKING BRAKE


: For some types AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.251) (P.140)
A/T model is shown.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:56 32SAA650_008

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Right-hand drive type


HORN PAD1 INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS2
(P.103)

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST


(P.106) (VSA) OFF SWITCH2 (P.265)

WINDSCREEN WIPERS/ FOG LIGHTS2, 3 (P.107/108)


WASHERS3
(P.104/105)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS3
(P.102, 103)

MIRROR CONTROLS2
REAR WINDOW (P.138)
DEMISTER
(P.106)
HEATED DOOR STEERING SHIFT
MIRRORS2 SWITCHES2 (P.256)
(P.138)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH2 HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER2
(P.110) (P.255) (P.109)

1 : To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2 : For some types
3 : On European models, these switches change locations with each other.
5

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:11:58 32SAA650_009

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:02 32SAA650_010

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important 6. Adjust the Steering Wheel ..... 20 Protecting Larger Children ........ 55
information about how to protect 7. Maintain a Proper Sitting Using Child Restraints with
yourself and your passengers. It Position ................................. 21 Tethers...................................... 60
shows you how to use seat belts Advice for Pregnant Women...... 22 Using the Lower Anchorages .... 62
properly. It explains your Supple- Additional Safety Precautions .... 22 Additional Information About Your
mental Restraint System. And it tells Protecting Children ......................... 24 Seat Belts .................................. 66
you how to properly restrain infants All Children Must Be Seat Belt System Components ... 66
and children in your vehicle. Restrained ................................ 25 Seat Belt Reminder Indicator ..... 66
Children Should Sit in the Back Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 67
Seat ............................................ 25 Lap Belt ......................................... 68
The Passengers Front Airbag Automatic Seat Belt
Poses Serious Risks to Tensioners ................................ 69
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Children ................................ 26 Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 70
Your Vehicles Safety Features........ 9 The Side Airbag Poses Serious Additional Information About
Seat Belts ...................................... 10 Risks to Children ..................... 29 Your Airbags ............................ 73
Airbags .......................................... 12 If You Must Drive with Several SRS Components ......................... 73
Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 13 Children .................................... 30 How Your Front Airbags
Head Restraints ........................... 14 If a Child Requires Close Work.......................................... 73
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ......... 14 Attention ................................... 30 How Your Side Airbags
Protecting Adults ............................. 15 Additional Safety Precautions .... 30 Work.......................................... 75
1. Close the Doors ....................... 15 General Guidelines for Using How the SRS Indicator Works ... 76
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 15 Child Restraint Systems ......... 31 Airbag Service .............................. 77
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 16 Child Restraint System for EU Additional Safety Precautions .... 78
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 17 Countries .................................. 37 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 79
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Protecting Infants ........................ 39 Safety Labels .................................... 80
Belts ...................................... 18 Protecting Small Children .......... 47

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:12 32SAA650_011

Important Safety Precautions

Youll find many safety small for a seat belt must be properly Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this restrained in a child restraint system Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. (see page 24 ). crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page the higher the speed the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the Be Aware of Airbag Hazards risk, but serious accidents can also
most important. While airbags can save lives, they occur at lower speeds. Never drive
can cause serious or fatal injuries to faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt occupants who sit too close to them, conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in or are not properly restrained. maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags (on Infants, young children, and short
some types) supplement seat belts, adults are at the greatest risk. Be Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
but front airbags are designed to sure to follow all instructions and Condition
inflate only in a moderate to severe warnings in this manual (see page Having a tyre blowout or a
frontal collision. Side airbags (on 12 ). mechanical failure can be extremely
some types) are designed to inflate hazardous. To reduce the possibility
only in a moderate to severe side Dont Drink and Drive of such problems, check your tyre
impact. So even though your vehicle Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even pressures and condition frequently,
is equipped with airbags, make sure one drink can reduce your ability to and perform all regularly scheduled
you and your passengers always respond to changing conditions, and maintenance (see page 278 , and for
wear your seat belts, and wear them your reaction time gets worse with EU countries, see the separate
properly. (See page 18 .) every additional drink. So dont drink service information booklet that
and drive, and dont let your friends came with your vehicle).
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either.
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
not the front seat. A child who is too

8 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:19 32SAA650_012

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many


(1) (3) (4) features that work together to
(6) protect you and your passengers
(9) during a crash.
(8) Some safety features do not require
(9) any action on your part. These
include a strong steel framework
(5) that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners (on some
(2) types) that automatically tighten the
front seat belts in the event of a
(10) crash.
(1) Safety Cage
(7) (2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(2) (6) Seat Belts
(7) Drivers Front Airbag
(8) Passengers Front Airbag
: For some types (9) Side Airbags
(10) Seat Belt Tensioners
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:26 32SAA650_013

Your Vehicles Safety Features

These safety features are designed Seat Belts Not wearing a seat belt properly
to reduce the severity of injuries in a For your safety, and the safety of increases the chance of serious
crash. However, you and your your passengers, your vehicle is injury or death in a crash, even
passengers cant take full advantage equipped with seat belts in all seating though your vehicle has airbags.
of these safety features unless you positions.
remain sitting in a proper position In most European Countries there is
and always wear your seat belts Your seat belt system also a law covering the use of seat belts.
properly. In fact, some safety includes an indicator on the Please take time to familiarize
features can contribute to injuries if instrument panel to remind you and yourself with the legal requirements
they are not used properly. your passengers to fasten your seat of the countries in which you will
belts. drive.

Why Wear Seat Belts


Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and Not wearing a seat belt
larger children. (Infants and smaller properly increases the
children must be properly restrained chance of serious injury or
in child restraint systems.) death in a crash, even if you
have airbags.

Be sure you and your


passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.

10 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:36 32SAA650_014

Your Vehicles Safety Features

When properly worn, seat belts: Of course, seat belts cannot WARNING:
completely protect you in every Seat belts are designed to bear upon
Keep you connected to the vehicle crash. But in most cases, seat belts the bony structure of the body, and
so you can take advantage of the can reduce your risk of serious should be worn low across the front
vehicles built-in safety features. injury. of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
Help protect you in almost every What you should do: Always wear lap section of the belt across the
type of crash, including frontal, your seat belt, and make sure you abdominal area must be avoided.
side, and rear impacts and wear it properly.
rollovers. Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
Help keep you from being thrown comfort, to provide the protection for
against the inside of the vehicle which they have been designed. A
and against other occupants. slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle. Belts should not be worn with straps
twisted.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A Each belt assembly must only be used
good position reduces the risk of by one occupant; it is dangerous to
injury from an inflating airbag, and put a belt around a child being carried
allows you to get the best on the occupants lap.
advantage from the airbag.

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:45 32SAA650_015

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags The most important things you need


(For some types) to know about your airbags are:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.


They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.

Front airbags offer no protection


in side impacts, rear impacts,
rollovers, or minor frontal
collisions.

Side airbags offer no protection in


frontal collisions, rear impacts,
rollovers, or minor side impacts.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental Only on models equipped with side
Restraint System (SRS) with front airbags
airbags to help protect the heads and Your vehicle also has side airbags to
chests of the driver and front seat help protect the upper torso of the
passengers during a moderate to driver or a front seat passenger
severe frontal collision (see page during a moderate to severe side
73 for more information on how impact (see page 75 for more
your front airbags work). information on how your side airbags
work).

12 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:12:51 32SAA650_016

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags can pose serious hazards. Seats & Seat-Backs What you should do: Move the front
To do their job, airbags must Your vehicles seats are designed to seats as far back as possible, and
inflate with tremendous force and keep you in a comfortable, upright keep adjustable seat-backs in an
speed. So while airbags help save position so you can take full upright position whenever the
lives, they can cause minor injuries, advantage of the protection offered vehicle is moving.
or more serious or even fatal by seat belts and the energy
injuries if occupants are not absorbing materials in the seats.
properly restrained or sitting
properly. How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
What you should do: Always wear example, sitting too close to the
your seat belt properly, and sit steering wheel or dashboard
upright and as far back as possible increases the risk of you or your
from the steering wheel or passenger being injured by striking
dashboard. the inside of the vehicle, or by an
inflating airbag.

Reclining a seat-back too far reduces


the seat belts effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seats
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:01 32SAA650_017

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Head Restraints Pre-Drive Safety Checklist Head restraints are properly


Head restraints can help protect you To make sure you and your adjusted (see page 17 ).
from whiplash and other injuries. For passengers get the maximum
maximum protection, the back of protection from your vehicles safety All doors and the tailgate are
your head should rest against the features, check the following each closed (see page 15 ).
centre of the head restraint. time before you drive away:
All luggage is properly stored or
All adults, and children who have secured (see page 241 ).
outgrown child restraint systems,
are wearing their seat belts and The rest of this section gives more
wearing them properly (see page detailed information about how you
18 ). can maximize your safety.

Any infant or small child is Remember, however, that no safety


properly restrained in a child system can prevent all injuries or
restraint system in the back seat deaths that can occur in severe
(see page 24 ). crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the front airbags
Front seat occupants are sitting (on some types) and side airbags (on
upright and as far back as possible some types) deploy.
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page 15 ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page


16 ).

14 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:10 32SAA650_018

Protecting Adults

Introduction 2.Adjust the Front Seats To reduce the chance of injury, wear
The following pages provide your seat belt properly, sit upright
instructions on how to properly with your back against the seat, and
protect the driver and other adult move the seat away from the
occupants. steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
These instructions also apply to full control of the vehicle.
children who have outgrown child
restraint systems and are large Also make sure your passenger
enough to wear lap/shoulder belts moves the seat as far to the rear as
(see page 55 for important additional possible.
guidelines on how to properly
protect larger children).

1.Close the Doors Any driver who sits too close to the
After everyone has entered the steering wheel is at risk of being
vehicle, be sure the doors and seriously injured or killed by striking
tailgate are closed. the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
Your vehicle has a door and during a crash.
tailgate monitor indicator
on the instrument panel to indicate
when any door or the tailgate is not
tightly closed.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:17 32SAA650_019

Protecting Adults

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs


Adjust the drivers seat-back to a
Sitting too close to a front comfortable, upright position,
airbag can result in serious leaving ample space between your
injury or death if the front chest and the airbag cover in the
airbags inflate. centre of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
Always sit as far back from you could be injured if the front
the front airbags as possible. airbag inflates.

Most shorter drivers can get far


enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals. A front passenger should also adjust
However, if you are concerned about the seat-back to an upright position,
sitting too close, we recommend that but as far from the dashboard as
you investigate whether some type possible. On vehicles with a
of adaptive equipment may help. passengers airbag, a passenger who
sits too close to the dashboard could
Once your seat is adjusted correctly, be injured if the airbag inflates.
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.

See page 124 for how to adjust the


front seats.

16 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:25 32SAA650_020

Protecting Adults

Reclining a seat-back so that the 4.Adjust the Head Restraints


shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupants chest Improperly positioning head
reduces the protective capability of restraints reduces their
the belt. It also increases the chance effectiveness and you can be
of sliding under the belt in a crash seriously injured in a crash.
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Make sure head restraints are
greater the risk of injury. in place and positioned
properly before driving.

Reclining the seat-back too Properly adjusted head restraints


far can result in serious injury will help protect occupants from
or death in a crash. Before driving, make sure everyone whiplash and other crash injuries.
with an adjustable head restraint has
Adjust the seat-back to an properly positioned the head See page 125 for how to adjust the
upright position and sit well restraint. The restraint should be head restraints.
back in the seat. positioned so the back of the
occupants head rests against the
centre of the restraint. A taller
See page 125 for how to adjust the person should adjust the restraint as
seat-backs. high as possible.

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:33 32SAA650_021

Protecting Adults

5.Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the belt again
Belts to remove any slack, then check that
Using a Lap/Shoulder Belt the belt rests across the centre of
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, your chest and over your shoulder.
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that This spreads the forces of a crash
the belt is not twisted, because a over the strongest bones in your
twisted belt can cause serious upper body.
injuries in a crash.

In the rear centre seating position,


be sure the detachable anchor is Improperly positioning the
latched securely (see page 131 ). seat belts can cause serious
Position the lap part of the belt as injury or death in a crash.
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of Make sure all seat belts are
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. properly positioned before
This lets your strong pelvic bones driving.
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.

18 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:41 32SAA650_022

Protecting Adults

Never place the shoulder portion of a Using the Lap Belt


lap/shoulder belt under your arm or (For some types)
behind your back. This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.

RELEASE BUTTON

If the seat belt touches or crosses


your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to Insert the latch plate into the buckle
adjust the seat belt anchor height. marked CENTER.

To adjust the height of a front seat If the belt is too short, hold the latch
belt anchor, squeeze the two release plate at a right angle and pull on the
buttons and slide the anchor up or plate to extend the belt. Then insert
down as needed (it has four the latch plate into the buckle, and
positions). tug on the belt to make sure the belt
is securely latched.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 19

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:49 32SAA650_023

Protecting Adults

If a Seat Belt Doesnt Work Properly 6.Adjust the Steering Wheel


If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash. No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt. Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
dealer check the belt as soon as
possible.

See page 66 for additional


information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts. Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
Position the belt as low as possible so that the wheel points toward your
across your hips. This lets your chest, not toward your face.
strong pelvic bones take the force of
a crash and reduces the chance of Pointing the steering wheel toward
internal injuries. your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
Pull on the loose end of the belt for a
snug but comfortable fit. See page 110 for how to adjust the
steering wheel.

20 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:13:57 32SAA650_024

Protecting Adults

7.Maintain a Proper Sitting On vehicles with a passengers front


Position airbag and side airbag
After all occupants have adjusted In addition, an occupant who is out of Sitting improperly or out of
their seats and put on seat belts, it is position in the front seat can be position can result in serious
very important that they continue to seriously or fatally injured by injury or death in a crash.
sit upright, well back in their seats striking interior parts of the vehicle,
with their feet on the floor until the or by being struck by an inflating Always sit upright, well back
vehicle is parked and the engine is front airbag. Being struck by an in the seat, with your feet on
off. inflating side airbag can result in the floor.
possibly serious injuries.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For On vehicles with passengers side airbag Remember, to get the best
example, if an occupant slouches, If a front passenger leans sideways protection from your vehicles
lies down, turns sideways, sits and his head is in the deployment airbags and other safety features,
forward, leans forward or sideways, path of the side airbag, an inflating you must sit properly and wear your
or puts one or both feet up, the side airbag can strike the passenger seat belt properly.
chance of injury during a crash is with enough force to very seriously
greatly increased. injure him.

Driver and Passenger Safety 21

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:04 32SAA650_025

Protecting Adults

Advice for Pregnant Women Pregnant women should also sit Additional Safety Precautions
upright and as far back as possible Never let passengers ride in the
from the steering wheel or luggage area or on top of a folded-
dashboard. This will reduce the risk down back seat. All passengers
of injuries to both the mother and must sit in locked, upright seats
her unborn child that can be caused and be properly restrained by seat
by a crash or an inflating airbag. belts.

Each time you have a check-up, ask Passengers should not stand up or
your doctor if its okay for you to change seats while the vehicle is
drive. moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
Because protecting the mother is the against other occupants, or out of
best way to protect her unborn child, the vehicle.
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.

We recommend that pregnant


women use a lap/shoulder belt
whenever possible. Remember to
keep the lap portion of the belt as
low as possible across your hips.

22 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:10 32SAA650_026

Protecting Adults

Two people should never use the Do not place hard or sharp objects On models with side airbags, do
same seat belt. If they do, they between yourself and a front not attach hard objects on or near
could be very seriously injured in a airbag. Carrying hard or sharp a front door. If a side airbag
crash. objects on your lap, or driving with inflates, a cup holder or other hard
a pipe or other sharp objects in object attached on or near the
Do not put any accessories on seat your mouth, can result in injuries door could be propelled inside the
belts. Devices intended to improve if your front airbag inflates. vehicle and hurt someone.
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can Do not attach or place objects on Keep your hands and arms away
severely compromise the the front airbag covers. Any object from the airbag covers. If your
protective capability of the seat attached to or placed on the covers hands or arms are close to the SRS
belt and increase the chance of marked SRS AIRBAG in the covers in the centre of the
serious injury in a crash. centre of the steering wheel and steering wheel and on top of the
on top of the dashboard (on some dashboard (on some types), they
types), could interfere with the could be injured if the front
proper operation of the airbags. Or, airbags inflates.
if the airbags inflate, the objects
could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.

Driver and Passenger Safety 23

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:16 32SAA650_027

Protecting Children

In most countries, child restraint


systems must meet the
Children who are specifications of the ECE 44
unrestrained or improperly regulation.
restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash. In many countries, the law requires
children younger than 12 years of
Any child too small for a seat age and less than 150 cm (60 in) in
belt should be properly height to be secured in an officially
restrained in an approved approved and suitable child restraint
child restraint system. system. In those countries, officially
A larger child should be approved and suitable child restraint
properly restrained with a systems must therefore be used in
Children depend on adults to protect seat belt and use a booster order to transport a child on any
them. However, despite their best seat if necessary. passenger seat whatsoever. Please
intentions, many parents and other check your local legal requirements.
adults may not know how to properly
protect young passengers.

So if you have children, or if you ever


need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.

24 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:26 32SAA650_028

Protecting Children

All Children Must Be Restrained Additional Precautions to Parents Children Should Sit in the Back
Each year, many children are injured Never hold an infant or child on Seat
or killed in vehicle crashes because your lap. If you are not wearing a According to crash statistics,
they are either unrestrained or not seat belt in a crash, you could be children of all ages and sizes are
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle thrown forward into the safer when they are properly
accidents are the number one cause dashboard and crush the child. restrained in the back seat, not the
of death of children ages 12 and front seat.
under. If you are wearing a seat belt, the
child can be torn from your arms In the back seat, children are less
To reduce the number of child during a crash. For example, if likely to be injured by striking hard
deaths and injuries, infants and your vehicle crashes into a parked interior parts during a collision or
children should always be properly vehicle at 48 km/h (30 mph), a hard braking. Also, children cannot
restrained whenever they ride in a 9 kg (20-lb) infant will become a be injured by an inflating airbag
vehicle. 275 kg (600-lb) force, and you will when they ride in the back.
not be able to hold on.
Any child who is too small to wear a
seat belt should be properly Never put a seat belt over yourself
restrained in a child restraint system and an infant or child. During a
(see page 31 ). crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
A larger child should always be serious injuries.
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed (see pages 55 and
57 ).

Driver and Passenger Safety 25

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:33 32SAA650_029

Protecting Children

The Passengers Front Airbag As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; If the passengers front airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children inflates, it can hit the rearward
(For some types) facing child restraint system with
Front airbags have been designed to great force. The rearward facing
help protect adults in a moderate to child restraint system can be
severe frontal collision. To do this, dislodged or struck with enough
the passengers front airbag is quite force to cause very serious injury to
large, and it inflates with tremendous the infant.
speed.

Infants
Never put a rearward facing child Extreme Hazard!
restraint system in the front seat of a
vehicle equipped with a passengers Do not use a rearward facing
front airbag. If the front airbag child restraint on a seat
inflates, it can hit the back of the protected by an airbag in
child restraint system with enough front of it!
force to kill or very seriously injure
an infant.

26 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:39 32SAA650_030

Protecting Children

Small Children Larger Children In all cases observe the legal


Placing a front facing child restraint Children who have outgrown child requirements of the countries in
system in the front seat of a vehicle restraint systems are also at risk of which you will drive.
equipped with a passengers front being injured or killed by an inflating
airbag can be hazardous. If the passengers front airbag. Whenever
vehicle seat is too far forward, or the possible, larger children should sit in
childs head is thrown forward the back seat, in a booster seat if
during a collision, an inflating front needed, and be properly restrained
airbag can strike the child with with a seat belt (see page 55 for
enough force to kill or very seriously important information about
injure a small child. protecting larger children).

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 27

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:44 32SAA650_031

Protecting Children

To remind you of the passengers As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94;


front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the windscreen
and on the front passengers
doorjamb. On some types, they are
also on the sun visor. Please read
and follow the instructions on these
labels.

Extreme Hazard!

Do not use a rearward facing


child restraint on a seat
protected by an airbag in
front of it!

28 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:14:50 32SAA650_032

Protecting Children

The Side Airbag Poses Serious To remind you of the side airbags
Risks to Children hazards, and that children must be
(For some types) properly restrained in the back seat,
Side airbags have been designed to your vehicle has the safety label on
help protect adults in a moderate to each front doorjamb.
severe side impact.
If any part of a childs body is in the
path of a deploying airbag, an
inflating side airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or Leaning over the front door
very seriously injure a child. can result in serious injury or
death if the side airbag
inflates.

Always sit upright with their


back against the seat-back.

Driver and Passenger Safety 29

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:01 32SAA650_033

Protecting Children

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Use childproof door locks to
Your vehicle has three seating Many parents say they prefer to put prevent children from opening the
positions in the back seat where an infant or small child in the front doors. Using this feature will
children can be properly restrained. passenger seat so they can watch the prevent children from opening the
child, or because the child requires doors and accidentally falling out
If you ever have to carry more than attention. (see page 121 ).
three children in your vehicle:
Placing a child in the front seat WARNING: Use the main power
Place the largest child in the front exposes the child to hazards from window switch to prevent children
seat, provided the child is large the passengers front airbag (on from opening the windows. Using
enough to wear a seat belt some types) and side airbag (on this feature will prevent children from
properly (see page 55 ). some types), and paying close playing with the windows, which
attention to a child distracts the could expose them to hazards or
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driver from the important tasks of distract the driver (see page 134 ).
rear as possible (see page 15 ). driving, placing both of you at risk.

Have the child sit upright and well If a child requires physical attention
back in the seat (see page 21 ). or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
Make sure the seat belt is properly adult ride with the child in the back
positioned and secured (see page seat. The back seat is far safer for a
18 ). child than the front.

30 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:08 32SAA650_034

Protecting Children

Do not leave children alone in your Keep vehicle keys and remote General Guidelines for Using
vehicle. Leaving children without transmitters (on some types) out Child Restraint Systems
adult supervision is illegal in some of the reach of children. Even very The following pages give general
countries and can be very young children learn how to guidelines for selecting and installing
hazardous. For example, infants unlock vehicle doors, turn on the child restraint systems for infants
and small children left in a vehicle ignition, and open the tailgate, and small children.
on a hot day can die from which can lead to accidental injury
heatstroke. And children left alone or death. Selecting a Child Restraint System
with the key in the ignition can To provide proper protection, a child
accidentally set the vehicle in WARNING: Always take the ignition restraint system should meet three
motion, possibly injuring key with you whenever you leave the requirements:
themselves or others. vehicle alone (with other occupants).

Lock all doors and the tailgate


when your vehicle is not in use.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle and be seriously injured or
could die. Teach your children not
to play in or around vehicles.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 31

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:15 32SAA650_035

Protecting Children

1. The child restraint system should 2. The child restraint system should
meet safety standards. In most be of the proper type and size to fit
countries, child restraint systems the child.
must meet the specifications of
the ECE 44 regulation. Look for Make sure the restraint system fits
the approval mark on the system your child. Check the manufacturers
and the manufacturers statement instructions and labels for height and
of compliance on the boxes. weight limits.

The manufacturer of the vehicle


does not assume any responsibility
for damage which would be caused
by a defect inherent in the recom-
mended child restraint system. Infants: Children up to about one
year old should be restrained in a
rearward facing, reclining child
restraint system. Only a rearward
facing child restraint system
provides the proper support to
protect an infants head, neck, and
back. See page 39 for additional
information on protecting infants.

32 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:23 32SAA650_036

Protecting Children

3. The child restraint system should Before purchasing a child restraint


fit the vehicle seating position (or system, we recommend that parents
positions) where it will be used. test the child restraint system in the
specific vehicle seating position (or
Due to variations in the design of positions) where they intend to use
child restraint systems, vehicle seats, the restraint system. If a previously
and seat belts, not all child restraint purchased child restraint system
systems will fit all vehicle seating does not fit, you may need to buy a
positions. different one that will fit.

However, Honda is confident that For EU countries, refer to page


one or more child restraint system 37 for the recommended child
model can fit and be properly restraint system.
Small Children: A child who is too installed in all recommended seating
large for a rearward facing child positions in your vehicle. For some types
restraint system, and who can sit up Your vehicle has lower anchorages
without support, should be installed for use with Child Restraint
restrained in a front facing child Anchorages System-compatible child
restraint system. See page 47 for restraint systems. For more
additional information on protecting information, see page 62 .
small children.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 33

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:34 32SAA650_037

Protecting Children

Placing a Child Restraint System Front Passengers Seat


This page briefly summarizes Infants: Never in the front seat, due
Hondas recommendations on where to the front airbag hazard.
to place rearward and front facing Small children: Not recommended,
child restraint systems in your due to the front airbag hazard. If a
vehicle. small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
Airbags Pose Serious most position and secure a front
Risks to Children facing child restraint system with
(For some types) the seat belt (see page 47 ).
The passengers front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill Back Seats
or seriously injure an infant in a Infants: Recommended positions.
rearward facing child restraint Properly secure a rearward facing
system. child restraint system (see pages
A small child in a front facing 39 and 62 ).
child restraint system is also at Small children: Recommended
risk. If the vehicle seat is too far positions. Properly secure a front
forward, or the childs head is facing child restraint system (see
thrown forward during a pages 47 and 62 ).
collision, an inflating front
airbag can kill or seriously For EU countries, refer to page
injure the child. 37 for placing a child restraint
If a small child must ride in the system.
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.

34 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:41 32SAA650_038

Protecting Children

Installing a Child Restraint System 1. Properly secure the child restraint See pages 41 and 48 for instructions
After selecting a proper child system to the vehicle. All child on how to secure child restraint
restraint system, and a good position restraint systems are designed to systems in this vehicle.
to install the restraint system, there be secured to the vehicle with the
are three main steps in installing the lap belt or the lap part of a lap/ For some types
restraint system: shoulder belt. On some models, See page 62 for instructions on how
some child restraint systems can to properly secure child restraint
be secured to the vehicles lower systems with lower anchorages in
anchorages instead. Follow the this vehicle.
system manufacturers
instructions. A restraint system If you use a lap/shoulder belt
which is not properly secured to without an additional lockable
the vehicle can endanger the life retractor, be sure you install a
of the child, and other occupants locking clip on the seat belt (see
in a crash. page 53 ).

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 35

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:15:49 32SAA650_039

Protecting Children

2. Make sure the child restraint If the child restraint system is not Storing a Child Restraint System
system is firmly secured. After secure, try installing it in a different When you are not using a child
installing a child restraint system, seating position, or use a different restraint system, either remove it
push and pull the restraint system style of child restraint system that and store it in a safe place, or make
forward and from side-to-side to can be firmly secured in the desired sure it is properly secured. An
verify that it is secure. seating position. unsecured child restraint system can
be thrown around the vehicle during
To provide security during normal For EU countries, refer to page a crash or sudden stop and injure
driving manoeuvres as well as during 37 for the recommended child someone.
a collision, we recommend that restraint system.
parents secure a child restraint
system as firmly as possible. 3. Secure the child in the child
restraint system. Make sure the
However, a child restraint system child is properly strapped in the
does not need to be rock solid. In child restraint system according to
some vehicles or seating positions, it the child restraint system makers
may be difficult to install a child instructions. A child who is not
restraint system so that it does not properly secured in a child
move at all. Some side-to-side or restraint system can be thrown out
back-and-forth movement can be of the restraint system in a crash
expected and should not reduce the and seriously injured.
child restraint systems effectiveness.

36 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:00 32SAA650_040

Protecting Children

Child Restraint System for EU Countries

Child Restraint Suitability for Various Seat Positions


Please use only the particular child restraints as given in this table.
Seating position
Mass Group
Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Centre

group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U
group 0 Up to 13 kg X U U
group I 9 kg to 18 kg UF U or Honda Iso-Fix U
group II 15 kg to 25 kg UF U U
group III 22 kg to 36 kg UF U U

UF= Suitable for forward-facing universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
U= Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
X= Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
: Move the front seat as far back as possible.

The particular child restraints in the above table are Honda Genuine Parts.
For a correct installation, please refer to the Child Restraint Instruction Manual.

CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:05 32SAA650_041

Protecting Children

For some types


Your vehicle is equipped with lower
The use of any child restraint anchorages at the outer seating
system which is not suitable positions on the rear seat. These
for Honda vehicles would not anchorages are only to be used with
properly secure the infant or a child restraint system designed to
child who could therefore be be attached to the lower anchorages.
killed or seriously injured. Refer to page 62 for how to install a
child restraint system to the lower
anchorages.

38 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:15 32SAA650_042

Protecting Children

Protecting Infants the rearward facing, reclining mode. Rearward Facing Child Restraint
System Placement
For EU countries, an approved
rearward facing child restraint
Placing a rearward facing system should be placed in any
child restraint system in the seating position in the back seat (see
front seat can result in page 37 ).
serious injury or death if the
passengers front airbag (Except for EU countries)
inflates. In this vehicle, a rearward facing
child restraint system can be placed
Always place a rearward in one of the outside positions in the
facing child restraint system back seat, but not in the front seat.
in the back seat, not the front.
Child Restraint System Type For some types
Only a rearward facing child We recommend that an infant be If you use the vehicles lower
restraint system provides proper restrained in a rearward facing child anchorages to secure a child
support for a babys head, neck and restraint system, until the infant is at restraint system, it should be placed
back. Infants up to about one year of least one year old, reaches the in one of the outside positions in the
age must be restrained in a rearward restraint system makers weight or back seat (see page 62 ).
facing child restraint system. height limit, and is able to sit up
without support.
Two types of restraints may be used:
a restraint system designed For EU countries, refer to page
exclusively for infants, or a 37 for the recommended child
convertible restraint system used in restraint system. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 39

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:22 32SAA650_043

Protecting Children

On vehicles with a passengers front As required by E.C.E Regulation No. 94; the infant.
airbag, never put a rearward facing
child restraint system in the front When properly installed, a rearward
seat. If the passengers front airbag facing child restraint system may
inflates, it can hit the back of the prevent the driver or a front-seat
restraint with enough force to kill or passenger from moving the seat as
seriously injure an infant. If an infant far back as recommended (see page
must be closely watched, we 15 ). Or it may prevent them from
recommend that another adult sit in locking the seat-back in the desired
the back seat with the baby. upright position (see page 16 ).

Do not put a rearward facing child Extreme Hazard! In either case, we recommend that
restraint system in a forward-facing you place the child restraint system
position. If placed facing forward, an Do not use a rearward facing directly behind the front passenger
infant could be very seriously injured child restraint on a seat seat, move the front seat as far
during a frontal collision. protected by an airbag in forward as needed, and leave it
front of it! unoccupied. Or you may wish to get
a smaller child restraint system that
allows you to safely carry a front
If the passengers front airbag passenger.
inflates, it can hit the rearward
facing child restraint system with
great force. The rearward facing
child restraint system can be
dislodged or struck with enough
force to cause very serious injury to

40 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:30 32SAA650_044

Protecting Children

Rearward Facing Child Restraint For some types


System Installation If you have a child restraint system
To properly route a lap/shoulder belt designed to be attached to the
through a child restraint system, vehicles lower anchorages, follow
follow the restraint system makers the instructions on page 62 .
instructions.

For EU countries, refer to page


37 for installing a child restraint
system.

The lap/shoulder belts in the back


seating positions have a lockable
retractor that must be activated to 1. Place the child restraint system in
secure a child restraint system. the desired back seating position.
Press both of the release buttons
The following pages provide at the bottom of the handle, then
instructions and tips on how to pull up the handle to the upright
secure a rearward facing child position. Make sure the handle is
restraint system with this type of latched and the child restraint is
seat belt. (The procedures in these positioned well back in the seat-
pages are described based on a child back.
restraint system available in EU
countries.)

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 41

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:36 32SAA650_045

Protecting Children

2. Route the belt through the 3. To activate the lockable retractor, 4. Route the shoulder part of the belt
restraint according to the restraint slowly pull the shoulder part of the into the clip at the back of the
system makers instructions, then belt all the way out until it stops. restraint, then let the belt feed
insert the latch plate into the back into the retractor.
buckle.

42 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:41 32SAA650_046

Protecting Children

5. After the belt has retracted, tug on


it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.

6. After confirming that the belt is 7. Push and pull the child restraint
locked, grab the shoulder part of system forward and from side to
the belt near the buckle and pull side to verify that it is secure
up to remove any slack from the enough to stay upright during
lap part of the belt. Remember, if normal driving manoeuvres. If the
the lap part of the belt is not tight, child restraint system is not
the child restraint system will not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
be secure. To remove slack, it may retract fully, then repeat these
help to put weight on the child steps.
restraint system, or push on the
back of the restraint system, while
pulling up on the belt.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 43

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:46 32SAA650_047

Protecting Children

To deactivate the lockable retractor On vehicles without additional lockable


and remove a child restraint system, retractor fitted to the seat where the
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat child is positioned
belt, and let the belt fully retract. See page 45 for how to secure a
rearward facing child restraint
system in the centre back seat with
the lap belt.

For tips on installing a rearward


facing child restraint system with
either type of seat belt, see page 46 .

44 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:52 32SAA650_048

Protecting Children

Installing a Rearward Facing Child Finally, push and pull the restraint
Restraint System with the Lap Belt forward and from side to side to
(For some types) verify that it is secure enough to stay
To install a rearward facing child upright during normal driving
restraint system in the centre back manoeuvres. If the restraint is not
seat with the lap belt, route the belt secure, unlatch the belt and repeat
through the restraint according to these steps.
the restraint system makers
instructions, then insert the latch For EU countries, refer to page
plate into the buckle. 37 for placing a child restraint
system.

Then pull hard on the loose end of


the belt to remove any slack (it may
help to put weight on the child
restraint system while pulling on the
belt).

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 45

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:16:58 32SAA650_049

Protecting Children

Rearward Facing Child Restraint Additional Precaution for Infants


System Installation Tips Never let children kneel on seats or
stand while the vehicle is in motion.
The violent forces created during
emergency braking will cause the
children to be thrown forward. The
children could be seriously injured or
killed.

For proper protection, an infant must


ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the babys
doctor or follow the child restraint
system makers recommendations.

To achieve the desired reclining


angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the restraint
as shown.

46 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:07 32SAA650_050

Protecting Children

Protecting Small Children Of the different restraint systems Front Facing Child Restraint System
available, we recommend those that Placement
have a five-point harness system as In this vehicle, the best place to
shown. install a front facing child restraint
system is in one of the seating
We also recommend that a small positions in the outer back seat.
child stay in the child restraint
system as long as possible, until the For EU countries, refer to page
child reaches the weight or height 37 for placing a child restraint
limit for the restraint system. system.

For EU countries, refer to page On vehicles with a passengers


37 for the recommended child airbag, placing a front facing child
restraint system. restraint system in the front seat of a
Child Restraint System Type vehicle equipped with a passengers
A child at least one year old who can front airbag can be hazardous. If the
sit up without support, and who fits vehicle seat is too far forward, or the
within the child restraint system childs head is thrown forward
makers weight and height limits, during a collision, an inflating front
should be restrained in a front facing, airbag can strike the child with
upright child restraint system. enough force to cause very serious
or fatal injuries. If a small child must
be closely watched, we recommend
that another adult sit in the back seat
with the child.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 47

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:14 32SAA650_051

Protecting Children

If it is necessary to put a front facing Front Facing Child Restraint System


child restraint system in the front, Installation
Improperly placing a front move the vehicle seat as far to the To properly route a lap/shoulder belt
facing child restraint system rear as possible, be sure the child through a child restraint system,
in the front seat can result in restraint system is firmly secured to follow the restraint system makers
serious injury or death if the the vehicle, and the child is properly instructions.
front airbags inflate. strapped in the restraint system.
For EU countries, refer to page
If you must place a front 37 for installing a child restraint
facing child restraint system system.
in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible When you secure a front facing child
and properly restrain the restraint system with a lap/shoulder
child. belt, you must use a locking clip on
the belt (see page 53 ).

48 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:22 32SAA650_052

Protecting Children

The lap/shoulder belts in the back


seating positions have a lockable
retractor that must be activated to
secure a child restraint system.

The following pages provide


instructions on how to secure a front
facing child restraint system with
this type of seat belt. (The
procedures in these pages are
described based on a child restraint
system available in EU countries.)

For some types 1. Place the child restraint system in 3. To activate the lockable retractor,
If you have a child restraint system the desired back seating position. slowly pull the shoulder part of the
designed to be attached to the Make sure the child restraint is belt all the way out until it stops.
vehicles lower anchorages, follow positioned well back in the seat-
the instructions on page 62 . back.

2. Route the belt through the


restraint according to the restraint
system makers instructions, then
insert the latch plate into the
buckle.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 49

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:29 32SAA650_053

Protecting Children

4. Push down the tab. Route the 6. After confirming that the belt is 7. Secure the belt in the slit by
shoulder part of the belt into the locked, grab the shoulder part of pushing up the tab. Make sure the
slit at the side of the restraint, the belt near the buckle and pull belt is not twisted and it is
then let the belt feed back into the up to remove any slack from the positioned properly in the slit.
retractor. lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
5. After the belt has retracted, tug on the child restraint system will not
it. If the belt is locked, you will not be secure. It may help to put
be able to pull it out. If you can pull weight on the child restraint
the belt out, it is not locked and system, or push on the back of the
you will need to repeat these steps. restraint system, while pulling up
on the belt.

50 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:36 32SAA650_054

Protecting Children

To deactivate the lockable retractor


and remove a child restraint system,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.

8. Push and pull the child restraint On vehicles without additional lockable
system forward and from side-to- retractor fitted to the seat where the
side to verify that it is secure child is positioned
enough to stay upright during When you secure a front facing child
normal driving manoeuvres. If the restraint system with a lap/shoulder
child restraint system is not belt, be sure you install a locking clip
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to on the seat belt (see page 53 ).
retract fully, then repeat these
steps. For some types
See page 52 for how to secure a front
facing child restraint system in the
centre back seat with the lap belt.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 51

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:43 32SAA650_055

Protecting Children

Installing a Front Facing Child Pull hard on the loose end of the belt For EU countries, refer to page
Restraint System with the Lap Belt to remove any slack; it may help to 37 for placing a child restraint
(For some types) put weight on the child restraint system.
system while pulling on the belt.

Finally, push and pull the restraint


forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to stay
upright during normal driving
manoeuvres. If the restraint is not
secure, unlatch the belt and repeat
these steps.

To install a front facing child


restraint system in the centre back
seat with the lap belt, route the belt
through the restraint according to
the restraint system makers
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.

52 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:53 32SAA650_056

Protecting Children

Using a Seat Belt Locking Clip To install a locking clip, do the


On vehicles without additional lockable following:
retractor fitted to the seat where the
child is positioned
Always use a seat belt locking clip
when you secure a child restraint
system to your vehicle with a lap/
shoulder belt. This helps prevent the
child restraint system from shifting
position or overturning.

A locking clip is usually included


with the child restraint system. If
you need a clip, contact the seats 3. Tightly grasp the belt near the
manufacturer or a store that sells latch plate. Pinch both parts of the
child restraints. 1. Place the child restraint in the belt together so they wont slip
passengers seat. Route the lap/ through the latch plate. Unbuckle
If it is necessary to put a front facing shoulder belt through the restraint the seat belt.
child restraint system in the front, according to the seat
move the vehicle seat as far to the manufacturers instructions. 4. Install the locking clip as shown.
rear as possible, be sure the child Position the clip as close as
restraint system is firmly secured to 2. Insert the latch plate into the possible to the latch plate.
the vehicle, and the child is properly buckle. Pull on the shoulder part
strapped in the restraint system (see of the belt to make sure there is
page 47 ). no slack in the lap portion.
CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 53

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:17:58 32SAA650_057

Protecting Children

5. Insert the latch plate into the Additional Precaution for Small
buckle. Push and pull on the child Children
restraint system to verify that it is Never let children kneel on seats or
held firmly in place. If it is not, stand while the vehicle is in motion.
repeat these steps until the The violent forces created during
restraint is secure. emergency braking will cause the
children to be thrown forward. The
children could be seriously injured or
killed.

54 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:05 32SAA650_058

Protecting Children

Protecting Larger Children On vehicles with a passengers front On vehicles with side airbags
When a child reaches the airbag
recommended weight or height limit
for a front facing child restraint Leaning over the front door
system, the child should sit in the Allowing a larger child to sit can result in serious injury or
back seat on a booster and wear a improperly in the front seat death if the side airbag
lap/shoulder belt. The lap/shoulder can result in injury or death if inflates.
belt provides better protection than the passengers front airbag
the lap belt. inflates. Always sit upright with their
back against the seat-back.
We recommend that the child use a If a larger child must sit in
booster seat until the child is tall front, make sure the child
enough to use the seat belt without a moves the seat as far back as
booster seat. possible, uses a booster seat
if needed, and wears the seat
The following pages give belt properly.
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 55

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:12 32SAA650_059

Protecting Children

Additional Precaution for Larger Checking Seat Belt Fit If the shoulder part of the belt rests
Children over the childs collarbone and
Never let children kneel on seats or against the centre of the chest, and
stand while the vehicle is in motion. the lap belt rests over the childs
The violent forces created during hipbones and touches the tops of the
emergency braking will cause the thighs as shown, the child is
children to be thrown forward. The probably big enough to wear the seat
children could be seriously injured or belt.
killed.
However, if the shoulder belt
touches or crosses the childs neck,
or if the lap belt crosses the childs
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child Do not let a child wear a seat belt
sit in the rear seat, all the way back across the neck or over the stomach.
against the seat, and put on the seat This could result in serious neck and
belt. Follow the instructions on page internal injuries during a crash.
18 . Then check how the belt fits.

56 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:20 32SAA650_060

Protecting Children

Do not let a child put the shoulder Using a Booster Seat A child should continue using a
part of a seat belt behind the back or booster seat until the child exceeds
under the arm. This could cause the booster seat manufacturers
very serious injuries during a crash. requirements.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a Even then, the child may still need to
crash and be injured. use a booster seat. Note that some
countries now require children to
Do not put any accessories on a seat use boosters until they reach a
belt. Devices intended to improve certain age and/or weight. Be sure
occupant comfort or reposition the to check current laws in the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely countries where you intend to drive.
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the For EU countries, refer to page
chance of serious injury in a crash. If a child needs a booster seat, we 37 for the booster seat placement.
recommend choosing a high or low-
Two children should never use the back style that allows the child to be
same seat belt. If they do, they could directly secured with the lap/
be very seriously injured in a crash. shoulder belt.

Whichever style you select, follow


the booster seat makers instructions.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 57

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:28 32SAA650_061

Protecting Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front Of course, children vary widely. And
It is recommended that all children while age may be one indicator of
ages 12 and under be properly when a child can safely ride in the
restrained in the back seat. front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
GUIDE
In addition, the passengers front
airbag (on some types), poses
serious risks to children. If the front
seat is too far forward and the childs
head is thrown forward during a
collision, or the child is unrestrained
For some types or out of position, an inflating front
An optional back-rest is available for airbag can kill or seriously injure the
a specific booster seat (see page child.
57 ). Install the back-rest to the
booster seat and adjust it to the On some types, the side airbag also
vehicle seat according to the booster poses risks. If any part of a larger
seat makers instructions. Make sure childs body is in the path of a
the seat belt is properly routed deploying airbag, the child could
through the guide at the shoulder of receive possibly serious injuries.
the back-rest and the belt does not
touch and cross the childs neck (see
page 18 ).

58 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:37 32SAA650_062

Protecting Children

Physical Size Maturity If you decide that a child can safely


Physically, a child must be large To safely ride in front, a child must ride up front, be sure to:
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to be able to follow the rules, including
properly fit over the hips, chest, and sitting properly and wearing the seat Carefully read the owners manual
shoulder (see pages 18 and 55 ). If belt properly throughout a ride. and make sure you understand all
the seat belt does not fit properly, seat belt instructions and all safety
the child should not sit in the front. information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-


most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back


against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is


properly positioned and secured.

If your vehicle has side airbags,


remind the child not to lean
toward the door.

Supervise the child. Even mature


children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

Driver and Passenger Safety 59

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:44 32SAA650_063

Protecting Children

Using Child Restraints with Since a tether can provide additional WASHER
Tethers security, we recommend using a
(For some types) tether whenever one is required or
Your vehicle has two anchor points available. (The owners may check
on the ceiling near the tailgate with the child restraint system
opening for securing a tether-style maker to determine whether a tether
child restraint system to the vehicle. is available for a particular child
restraint system.)

Remove the rear head restraints (see


page 126 ). The removed head
restraints should be secured so they BOLT PLASTIC COVER
will not be thrown while you are
driving. Make sure to replace the The anchor points are located on
rear head restraints when the child both sides of the ceiling near the
restraint systems are not in use. tailgate opening. One side is covered
with only a cap and one side is
located inside the plastic cover. The
cap which covers one of the anchors
may be removed by hand, and a flat
tipped screwdriver may be used to
remove the plastic cover from the
other anchor point.

Remove the bolt and washer from


the left anchor point.

60 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:18:52 32SAA650_064

Protecting Children

To attach the tether to the child


ANCHOR
FITTING restraint system, follow the child
restraint system makers instructions.

When the child restraint system is


WASHER
used, follow the instructions that
SPACER came with the child restraint system.
ANCHOR
FITTING WARNING: Child restraint anchorages
are designed to withstand only those
WASHER
loads imposed by correctly fitted child
BOLT ATTACHING CLIP restraints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat belts,
Attach the anchor fitting to the Attach the attaching clip to the harnesses or for attaching other items
anchor point as shown in the anchor fitting as shown in the or equipment to the vehicle.
illustration. illustration, then tighten the strap
according to the child restraint
system makers instructions. Make
sure the strap is not twisted.

Driver and Passenger Safety 61

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:00 32SAA650_065

Protecting Children

Using the Lower Anchorages To install a child restraint system


(For some types) LOWER ANCHORAGES designed to be attached to the lower
Your vehicle is equipped with lower anchorages:
anchorages at the outer rear seats.
These anchorages are located 1. Move the seat belt buckle or
between the seat-back and seat centre seat belt away from the
bottom and are to be used only with anchorages.
a child restraint system designed for
use with the lower anchorages. 2. Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchorages.
For EU countries, refer to page Foreign objects could get in the
37 for the recommended child way of a secure connection
restraint system. between the child restraint system
The location of each lower and the anchorages.
anchorage is shown in the above
illustration.

62 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:07 32SAA650_066

Protecting Children

LOWER ANCHORAGE BUCKLE

GUIDE-CUP GUIDE-CUP Rigid type

(For some types) To attach the guide-cups to the seats 3. Put the child restraint system in
Install the child restraint system lower anchorages, insert as shown the rear left or right vehicle seat
according to the seat manufacturers on the illustration. and attach the child restraint
instructions. Occasionally, the seat belt buckle is system to the lower anchorages
wedged into the seats when according to the child restraint
operating them. system makers instructions.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 63

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:14 32SAA650_067

Protecting Children

4. Remove the rear head restraints


(see page 126 ). The removed WASHER
head restraints should be secured
so they will not be thrown while
you are driving. Make sure to
replace the rear head restraints WASHER
when the child restraint systems SPACER
are not in use. ANCHOR
FITTING
WASHER

BOLT PLASTIC COVER BOLT

5. The anchor points are located on 6. Attach the anchor fitting to the
both sides of the ceiling near the anchor point as shown in the
tailgate opening. One side is illustration.
covered with only a cap and one
side is located inside the plastic
cover. The cap which covers one
of the anchors may be removed by
hand, and a flat tipped screwdriver
may be used to remove the plastic
cover from the other anchor point.

Remove the bolt and washer from


the left anchor point.

64 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:20 32SAA650_068

Protecting Children

To attach the tether to the child WARNING: Child restraint anchorages


ANCHOR FITTING restraint system, follow the child are designed to withstand only those
restraint system makers instructions. loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are
When the child restraint system is they to be used for adult seat belts,
used, follow the instructions that harnesses or for attaching other items
came with the child restraint system. or equipment to the vehicle.

ATTACHING CLIP

7. Attach the attaching clip to the


anchor fitting as shown in the
illustration, then tighten the strap
according to the child restraint
system makers instructions.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Driver and Passenger Safety 65

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:28 32SAA650_069

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Seat Belt Reminder (Except EU models)


Your seat belt system includes lap/ Indicator The seat belt system also includes an
shoulder belts in all five seating (EU models) indicator on the instrument panel to
positions. On some types, the centre The seat belt system includes an remind you and your passengers to
position of the rear seat has a lap indicator on the instrument panel fasten your belts. If the drivers seat
belt. and a beeper to remind you and your belt is not fastened before the
On some types, the front seat belts passengers to fasten your seat belts. ignition is turned to the ON (II)
are also equipped with automatic position, the indicator will come on
seat belt tensioners. If you turn the ignition switch to the and a beeper will also sound. The
ON (II) position before fastening beeper will stop after a few seconds,
your seat belt, the beeper sounds but the indicator will stay on until the
and the indicator flashes. If you do drivers seat belt is fastened.
not fasten your seat belt before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops On some types, the seat belt system
flashing but remains on. does not have a reminder beeper.
Only the indicator comes on as
If you continue driving without described above.
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.

66 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:39 32SAA650_070

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Lap/Shoulder Belt The lap/shoulder belt goes over See page 18 for instructions on how
your shoulder, across your chest and to wear the lap/shoulder belt
SHOULDER UPPER SEAT across your hips. properly.
PORTION BELT ANCHOR

To fasten the belt, insert the latch The lap/shoulder belts in all rear
plate into the buckle, then tug on the outboard seating positions have an
belt to make sure the buckle is additional locking mechanism that
LATCH latched. must be activated to secure a child
PLATE
restraint. (See pages 41 and 48 for
To unlock the belt, push the red instructions on how to secure child
PRESS button on the buckle. restraints with this type of seat belt.)

BUCKLE LAP PORTION Guide the belt across your body to If the shoulder part of the belt is
the door pillar. After exiting the pulled all the way out, the lockable
Your vehicle has two types of lap/ vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the retractor will be activated. The belt
shoulder belts. The centre seating way and will not get closed in the will retract, but it will not allow the
position of the rear seat has the lap/ door. passenger to move freely.
shoulder belt with a detachable
anchor. All other seating positions All lap/shoulder belts have an To deactivate the lockable retractor,
have a one-piece lap/shoulder belt. emergency lockable retractor. unlatch the buckle and let the seat
In normal driving, the retractor lets belt fully retract. To refasten the belt,
For some types you move freely in your seat while it pull it out only as far as needed.
The centre seating position of the keeps some tension on the belt.
rear seat has the lap belt. During a collision or sudden stop,
the retractor automatically locks the
belt to help restrain your body. CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 67

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:49 32SAA650_071

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

To fasten the belt, extend it from the Lap Belt


anchor on the ceiling by pulling the (For some types)
metal plate. The lap belt has one manually-
adjusted belt that fits across the hips.
Line up the triangle marks on the
small latch plate and anchor buckle, BUCKLE
then insert the plate into the buckle.
Tug on the seat belt to verify that
the detachable anchor is securely
latched.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle


marked CENTRE, then tug on the
belt to make sure it is securely
On some types, the lap/shoulder belt latched.
in the centre seating position on the LATCH PLATE
rear seat is equipped with a To unlock the belt, push the red
detachable anchor that has two PRESS button on the buckle. To fasten the belt, insert the latch
parts: a small latch plate and an plate into the buckle marked
anchor buckle. CENTER, then tug on the belt to
make sure the buckle is latched.
The detachable anchor should be
securely latched whenever the To unlock the belt, push the red
centre seating position is used. For PRESS button.
more information about the
detachable anchor, see page 131 .

68 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:19:56 32SAA650_072

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

See page 19 for how to lengthen the Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners When the tensioners are activated,
lap belt, and how to properly position (For some types) the seat belts will remain tight until
the belt. they are unbuckled in the normal
way.

The SRS indicator will


come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page 76 ).

For added protection during a


moderate to severe frontal collision,
the front seat belts are equipped
with automatic seat belt tensioners.
If your front airbags inflate, the
tensioners immediately tighten the
belts to help hold the driver and a
front passenger in place.

Driver and Passenger Safety 69

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:03 32SAA650_073

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash, WARNING: It is essential to replace
For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A the entire assembly after it has been
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a worn in a severe impact even if damage
crash may not provide the same level to the assembly is not obvious.
Pull each belt out fully and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check The dealer should also inspect the WARNING: Care should be taken to
that the latches work smoothly and anchors for damage and replace avoid contamination of the webbing with
that the lap/shoulder belts retract them if needed. polishes, oils and chemicals, and
easily. Any belt not in good condition particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
or not working properly will not Automatic seat belt tensioners that safely be carried out using mild soap and
provide good protection and should deployed during a crash must be water. The belt should be replaced if
be replaced as soon as possible. replaced. webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
or damaged.
WARNING: No modifications or
additions should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted to remove
slack.

70 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:10 32SAA650_074

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Anchorage Points (Front Seat)


When replacing the seat belts, make
Not checking or maintaining certain to use the anchorage points
seat belts can result in shown in the illustrations.
serious injury or death if the
seat belts do not work
properly when needed.

Check your seat belts


regularly and have any
problem corrected as soon as
possible.

For information on how to clean your


seat belts, see page 350 .

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 71

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:16 32SAA650_075

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

(Rear Seat)
On the models with three lap/shoulder On the models with a lap belt in the
belts in the back seat centre position of the back seat

The rear seat has three lap/shoulder On some types, the outside positions
belts. of the rear seat have lap/shoulder
belts. The centre position has a lap
belt.

72 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:26 32SAA650_076

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

SRS Components Automatic seat belt tensioners How Your Front Airbags Work
Your Supplemental Restraint System that tighten the front seat belts
(SRS) includes: during a moderate to severe
frontal collision (see page 69 ).
Two front airbags (on some types).
The drivers airbag is stored in the Sensors that can detect a
centre of the steering wheel; the moderate to severe frontal
front passengers airbag is stored collision.
in the dashboard. Both are
marked SRS AIRBAG. A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors
(For some types) information about the sensors, the
Two side airbags, one for the control unit, and the airbag
driver and one for a front activators when the ignition switch
passenger. The airbags are stored is in the ON (II) position. If you ever have a moderate to
in the outer edges of the seat- severe frontal collision, the sensors
backs. Both are marked SIDE An indicator on the instrument will detect rapid deceleration and
AIRBAG (see page 75 ). panel that alerts you to a possible signal the control unit to instantly
problem with the system (see inflate the front airbags and activate
page 76 ). the automatic seat belt tensioners.

Emergency backup power in case


your vehicles electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:32 32SAA650_077

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

During a frontal crash, your seat belt After a crash, you may see what
helps restrain your lower body and looks like smoke. This is actually
torso, while the tensioner tightens powder from the airbags surface.
and locks the seat belt to help keep Although the powder is not harmful,
you in place. Your airbag provides a people with respiratory problems
cushion to help restrain and protect may experience some temporary
your head and chest. discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
Since both front airbags use the so.
same sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.

This can occur when the severity of After inflating, the front airbags
a collision is at the margin, or immediately deflate, so they wont
threshold, that determines whether interfere with the drivers visibility,
or not the front airbags will deploy. or the ability to steer or operate
In such cases, the seat belt will other controls.
provide sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by The total time for inflation and
the airbag would be minimal. deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
front airbags deployed until they see
them lying in their laps.

74 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:39 32SAA650_078

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

How Your Side Airbags Work If you ever have a moderate to If a front passenger leans sideways
(For some types) severe side impact, the sensors will and his head is in the deployment
detect rapid deceleration and signal path of the side airbag, he can be
the control unit to instantly inflate seriously injured by an inflating side
either the drivers or the passengers airbag. An inflating side airbag can
side airbag. strike the child with enough force to
kill or very seriously injure a child.
Only one airbag will deploy during a For the information of the side
side impact. If the impact is on the airbags hazards, see pages 29 and
passengers side, the passengers 55 .
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the


side airbags, front seat occupants
Your vehicle is equipped with side should wear their seat belts and sit
airbags for the driver and a front upright and well back in their seats.
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
SIDE AIRBAG.

Driver and Passenger Safety 75

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:47 32SAA650_079

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

How the SRS Indicator Works If the indicator comes on at any If you see any of these indications,
The SRS indicator alerts other time, or does not come on at all, your front or side airbags may not
you to a potential problem you should have the system checked deploy, or your seat belt tensioners
with your front airbags. This by your dealer. For example: may not work when you need them.
indicator will also alert you to a See your dealer as soon as possible.
potential problem with your If the SRS indicator does not come
automatic seat belt tensioners (see on after you turn the ignition
page 69 ). switch to the ON (II) position.

On models with side airbags, this If the indicator stays on after the
indicator will also alert you to a engine starts.
potential problem with your side
airbags. If the indicator comes on or
flashes on and off while you drive.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
will come on for several seconds
then go out. This tells you that the
system is working properly.

76 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:20:54 32SAA650_080

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to a


Your front and side airbag systems problem. Take your vehicle to
Ignoring the SRS indicator (if equipped) and automatic seat belt your authorized dealer as soon as
can result in serious injury or tensioners are virtually maintenance- possible. If you ignore this
death if the airbags or free, and there are no parts you can indication, the airbags might not
tensioners do not work safely service. However, you must inflate when you need them.
properly. have your vehicle serviced if:
Handling is allowed by trained
Have your vehicle checked by Your airbags ever inflate. Any personnel only. It is prohibited to
a dealer as soon as possible if airbag that has deployed must be remove the airbag unit/belt-
the SRS indicator alerts you replaced along with the control tensioner from the vehicle. In case of
to a potential problem. unit, automatic seat belt malfunction, shutdown or after
tensioners, and other related parts. airbag inflation/belt-tensioner
Do not try to remove or replace operation you have to ask a qualified
any airbag by yourself. This must shop for repair or removal.
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.

CONTINUED

Driver and Passenger Safety 77

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:00 32SAA650_081

Additional Information About Your Airbags (For some types)

Additional Safety Precautions On vehicles with side airbags See page 240 for further information
Do not attempt to deactivate your Do not expose the front seat-backs and precautions relating to your
airbags. Together, airbags and to water. If rain or spilled water airbags.
seat belts provide the best soaks into a seat-back, it can
protection. prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Do not tamper with airbag and
automatic seat belt tensioner Do not cover or replace front seat-
components or wiring for any back covers without consulting
reason. Tampering could cause your dealer. Improperly replacing
the airbags and automatic seat belt or covering front seat-back covers
tensioners to deploy, possibly can prevent your side airbags from
causing very serious injury. inflating during a collision.

78 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:08 32SAA650_082

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicles exhaust contains With the tailgate open, air flow can
carbon monoxide gas. You should pull exhaust gas into your vehicles
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition.
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even
vehicle properly. kill you. If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or engine running, adjust the heating
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to and cooling system/climate control
carbon monoxide. system as follows:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change. 1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can 2. Select the mode.
of the exhaust. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 3. Set the fan speed to high.
The vehicle was in an accident such as a garage. Do not run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the under- engine with the garage door closed. comfortable setting.
side. Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.

Driver and Passenger Safety 79

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:16 32SAA650_083

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations SRS AIRBAG SRS AIRBAG


shown. They warn you of potential CHILD SAFETY (Right-hand drive type) (Left-hand drive type)
hazards that could cause serious (Left-hand drive type)
injury. Read these labels carefully. If (For some types) CHILD SAFETY
a label comes off or becomes hard to (Right-hand drive type)
read, contact your dealer for a (For some types)
replacement. BATTERY DANGER LABEL
(For some types)
On some types, the label shown
below is attached to the back of the
bonnet.

SRS Airbag

SRS Airbag
SEAT LABEL
Safety alert symbol
CHILD SAFETY
(For some types)
Follow service manual
instructions carefully SIDE AIRBAG
(For some types)

SRS AIRBAG RADIATOR CAP DANGER LABEL

80 Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:23 32SAA650_084

Safety Labels

On vehicles with side airbags, the On some models, the labels shown
label shown below is attached to below are attached to the
each front doorjamb. windscreen and each front doorjamb.

Side Airbag

Safety alert symbol

Follow owners manual


instructions carefully

Driver and Passenger Safety 81

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:25 32SAA650_085

82

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:30 32SAA650_086

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about Turn Signals ............................... 103 Head Restraints ......................... 125
the controls and displays that Windscreen Wipers ................... 104 Folding the Rear Seats .............. 127
contribute to the daily operation of Windscreen Washers ................ 105 Create the Luggage Space ....... 128
your vehicle. All the essential Rear Window Wiper and Detachable Anchor.................... 131
controls are within easy reach. Washer .................................... 105 Tonneau Cover............................... 132
Hazard Warning......................... 106 Power Windows ............................. 134
Rear Window Demister ............ 106 Sunroof ............................................ 136
Rear Fog Light ........................... 107 Mirrors ............................................ 137
Front Fog Light ......................... 107 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ... 138
Front and Rear Fog Lights ....... 108 Heated Door Mirrors ................ 138
Control Locations ............................ 84 Headlight Adjuster .................... 109 Folding Door Mirrors ............... 139
Indicator Lights................................ 86 Steering Wheel Adjustment ..... 109 Sun Visor......................................... 139
Gauges .............................................. 96 Keys and Locks.............................. 110 Vanity Mirror ................................. 140
Speedometer ................................ 96 Keys............................................. 110 Parking Brake ................................ 140
Tachometer .................................. 96 Immobilizer System................... 112 Coat Hook ....................................... 141
Odometer ...................................... 97 Ignition Switch ........................... 113 Beverage Holder ............................ 141
Trip Meter .................................... 97 Door Locks ................................. 114 Cigarette Lighter ........................... 142
Segment Distance and Power Door Locks ..................... 115 Ashtray ............................................ 142
Fuel Mileage ............................ 97 Remote Transmitter .................. 117 Accessory Power Socket .............. 143
Outside Temperature Childproof Door Locks ............. 121 Luggage Hooks .............................. 144
Indicator .....................................98 Tailgate ....................................... 121 Interior Lights ................................ 144
Fuel Gauge ................................... 99 Glove Box ................................... 123 Spotlights .................................... 144
Controls Near the Steering Seats ................................................ 124 Individual Map Lights ............... 144
Wheel ...................................... 100 Front Seat Adjustments ............ 124 Ceiling Light ............................... 145
Headlights .................................. 102 Drivers Seat Height Luggage Area Light .................. 145
Instrument Panel Brightness ... 103 Adjustment ............................. 125

Instruments and Controls 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:36 32SAA650_087

Control Locations

Left-hand drive type

INDICATOR LIGHTS (P.86) HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS


REMOTE GAUGES (P.96) (P.148)
AUDIO CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTROLS
(P.226) (P.157)

MASTER
DOOR LOCK
BUTTON
(P.115)

AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW (P.167)
SWITCHES
(P.134)

BONNET RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.233)

PARKING BRAKE MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.248)


: For some types (P.140) AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.251)
A/T model is shown.

84 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:42 32SAA650_088

Control Locations

Right-hand drive type

HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS (P.148) INDICATOR LIGHTS (P.86)


CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.157) GAUGES (P.96)

REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS (P.226)

MASTER DOOR LOCK


BUTTON
(P.115)

AUDIO SYSTEM POWER WINDOW


(P.167) SWITCHES
(P.134)

BONNET RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.233)

: For some types MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P.248) PARKING BRAKE


A/T model is shown. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT)(P.251) (P.140)

Instruments and Controls 85

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:49 32SAA650_089

Indicator Lights
Honda CVT 7 Speed Mode model

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE


(P.94) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)
DOOR/TAILGATE LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.94)
OPEN INDICATOR
(P.94) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P.93)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.92, 370) (P.95)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR (P.94)

CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.92, 369)

LOW OIL PRESSURE FRONT FOG LIGHTS ON LOW TEMPERATURE


INDICATOR LIGHT INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P.92, 368) INDICATOR (P.93) (P.95)
(P.94)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
(P.92) INDICATOR (P.91)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
(P.94) (P.91)

86 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:21:56 32SAA650_090

Indicator Lights
Automatic transmission (CVT) model

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE


SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DOOR/TAILGATE LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.94)
(P.94) OPEN INDICATOR
(P.94) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
INDICATOR (P.93)
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (P.95)
(P.92, 370) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
(P.94)

CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.92, 369)

LOW TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
FRONT FOG LIGHT LIGHTS ON (P.95)
INDICATOR INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (P.94) (P.93) SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
(P.92, 368) INDICATOR (P.91)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR REAR FOG LIGHT SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
(P.92) INDICATOR (P.94) (P.91)

Instruments and Controls 87

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:03 32SAA650_091

Indicator Lights
Automatic transmission (CVT) model

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR


(P.95) (P.91)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
(P.92) INDICATOR
(P.93)
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.95) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
(P.94)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P.94)

MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.92, 370)

DOOR/TAILGATE
OPEN INDICATOR
(P.94)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.91)
CHARGING SYSTEM HIGH BEAM LOW FUEL INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.94)
(P.92, 369) (P.94)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.92, 368) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.95)
(P.94)

88 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:11 32SAA650_092

Indicator Lights
Manual transmission model

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM


INDICATOR (P.93)

DOOR/TAILGATE OPEN INDICATOR PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.94)
(P.94) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.95)
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.94) INDICATOR (P.93)

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR HIGH TEMPERATURE


(P.93) INDICATOR
(P.95)
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR ELECTRIC POWER
LAMP (P.92, 370) STEERING (EPS)
INDICATOR
(P.94)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.92, 369)

LOW OIL PRESSURE FRONT FOG LIGHT LIGHTS ON LOW TEMPERATURE


INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P.92, 368) (P.94) (P.93) (P.95)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR REAR FOG LIGHT SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
(P.92) INDICATOR INDICATOR
(P.94) (P.91)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
(P.91)

Instruments and Controls 89

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:18 32SAA650_093

Indicator Lights
Manual transmission model

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) INDICATOR


(P.95) (P.91)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
(P.92) INDICATOR
(P.93)
HIGH TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
(P.95) ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
(EPS) INDICATOR
(P.94)
REAR FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P.94)

MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
(P.92, 370)

DOOR/TAILGATE
OPEN INDICATOR
(P.94)
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
(P.91)
CHARGING SYSTEM HIGH BEAM LOW FUEL INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.94)
(P.92, 369) (P.94)
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
(P.92, 368) PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
FRONT FOG LIGHT INDICATOR (P.95)
(P.94)

90 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:27 32SAA650_094

Indicator Lights

The instrument panel has many (Except EU models) Supplemental Restraint


indicators to give you important This indicator comes on when you System (SRS) Indicator
information about your vehicle. turn the ignition switch to the ON This indicator comes on when you
(II) position. It is a reminder to you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Seat Belt Reminder and your passengers to protect (II) position. If it comes on at any
Indicator yourselves by fastening the seat other time, it indicates a potential
(EU models) belts. The indicator stays on until problem with your front airbags or
The seat belt system includes an you fasten seat belt. The indicator automatic seat belt tensioners. On
indicator on the instrument panel stays off if you fasten your seat belt models equipped with side airbags,
and a beeper to remind you and your before turning on the ignition. A this indicator will also alert you to a
passengers to fasten your seat belts. beeper also sounds if you have not potential problem with your side
fastened your seat belt. airbags. For more information, see
If you turn the ignition switch to the page 76 .
ON (II) position before fastening If you do not fasten your seat belt,
your seat belt, the beeper sounds the beeper will stop after a few
and the indicator flashes. If you do seconds but the indicator stays on
not fasten your seat belt before the until you do. Both the indicator and
beeper stops, the indicator stops the beeper stay off if you fasten your
flashing but remains on. seat belt before turning on the
ignition switch.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper On some types, the seat belt system
sounds and the indicator flashes does not have a reminder beeper.
again at regular intervals. Only the indicator comes on as
described above.

Instruments and Controls 91

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:39 32SAA650_095

Indicator Lights

Malfunction Indicator Immobilizer System


Lamp Indicator
See page 370 . (For some types) Turn Signal and Hazard Warning
This indicator comes on for a few Indicators
Low Oil Pressure seconds when you turn the ignition The left or right turn signal indicator
Indicator switch to the ON (II) position. It will blinks when you signal a lane change
The engine can be severely damaged then go off if you have inserted a or turn. If the indicator does not
if this indicator flashes or stays on properly-coded ignition key. If it is blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
when the engine is running. For not a properly-coded key, the means one of the turn signal bulbs is
more information, see page 368 . indicator will blink and the engine burned out (see pages 328 and 329 ).
will not start (see page 112 ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
Charging System since other drivers cannot see that
Indicator This indicator also blinks several you are signaling.
If this indicator comes on when the times when you turn the ignition
engine is running, the battery is not switch from the ON (II) to the When you press the Hazard Warning
being charged. For more information, ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) button, both turn signal indicators
see page 369 . position. blink. All turn signals on the outside
of the vehicle should flash.

Hazard Warning
Indicator
(For some types)
This indicator blinks with both turn
signal indicators when you turn on
the Hazard Warning button.

92 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:22:53 32SAA650_096

Indicator Lights

Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Lights On Indicator


(VSA) System Indicator (For some types) (For some types)
(For some types) This indicator has three functions: This indicator reminds you that the
This indicator normally comes on for exterior lights are on. It comes on
a few seconds when you turn the 1. It comes on as a reminder that you when the light switch is in either the
ignition switch to the ON (II) have turned off the Vehicle or position. If you turn the
position. Stability Assist (VSA) system. ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the LOCK (0) position without
If this indicator comes on and stays 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see turning off the light switch, this
on at any other time, or it does not page 264 ). indicator will remain on. A reminder
come on when you turn the ignition beeper will also sound when you
switch to the ON (II) position, there 3. It comes on along with the VSA open the drivers door.
is a problem with the VSA system. system indicator if there is a Anti-lock Brake System
Take the vehicle to your dealer to problem with the VSA system. (ABS) Indicator
have it checked. Without VSA, your (For some types)
vehicle still has normal driving ability, This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for
but will not have VSA traction and a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the
stability enhancement. See page ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II)
265 for more information on the position. See page 265 for more position. If this indicator comes on at
VSA system. information on the VSA system. any other time, there is a problem in
the ABS. If this happens, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the indicator on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For more
information, see page 261 .

Instruments and Controls 93

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:06 32SAA650_097

Indicator Lights

Electric Power Steering Low Fuel Indicator Door and Tailgate Open
(EPS) Indicator Indicator
This indicator normally comes on If the indicator glows, it means you This indicator comes on if any door
when you turn the ignition switch to should refuel, because the tank or the tailgate is not closed tightly.
the ON (II) position and goes off contains less than:
after the engine starts. If it comes on 7.9 (2.09 US gal , 1.74 Imp gal) Front Fog Light
at any other time, there is a problem Indicator
in the Electric Power Steering High Beam Indicator (For some types)
system. If this happens, stop the This indicator lights when you turn
vehicle in a safe place and turn off This indicator comes on with the on the front fog lights. See page
the engine. Reset the system by high beam headlights. See page 107 for information on operating the
restarting the engine. The indicator 102 for information on the headlight front fog lights.
will not be turned off immediately, so controls.
you should drive several kilometers For some types
and watch the EPS indicator. If it Rear Fog Light Indicator See page 108 to operate the front
does not go off, or comes back on (For some types) and rear fog lights.
again while driving, take the vehicle This indicator lights when you turn
to your dealer to have it checked. on the rear fog light. See page
With the indicator on, the EPS is 107 for information on operating the
turned off, making the vehicle rear fog light.
harder to steer.
For some types
See page 108 to operate the front
and rear fog lights.

94 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:15 32SAA650_098

Indicator Lights

Parking Brake and High Temperature Low Temperature


Brake System Indicator Indicator Indicator
This indicator has two functions: This shows the temperature of the This shows the temperature of the
engines coolant. This indicator engines coolant. There is no
1. This indicator is a reminder to normally comes on when you turn problem when this indicator comes
check the parking brake. On some the ignition switch to the ON (II) on when the engine is cold. If it
types, it comes on when you turn position and goes off after the engine comes on when the engine is warm
the ignition switch to the ON (II) starts. In normal driving conditions, (normal operating temperature),
position. Driving with the parking the indicator should not be turned on. have the vehicle inspected by your
brake not fully released can In severe driving conditions, such as dealer as soon as possible.
damage the brakes and tyres. very hot weather or a long period of
uphill driving, the indicator will begin
2. If the indicator remains lit after to blink. It may continue to blink as
you have fully released the the temperature rises. If this occurs
parking brake while the engine is while you are driving, be sure to limit
running, or if it comes on while your speed to prevent further
driving, it can indicate a problem overheating. If the indicator remains
in the brake system. For more on, then you must pull safely to the
information, see page 371 . side of the road. See page 366 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engines cooling
system.

Do not drive the vehicle while the


indicator is on or the engine may be
damaged.

Instruments and Controls 95

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:23 32SAA650_099

Gauges

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER SELECT/RESET KNOB On some types, the instrument panel


illuminates when you open the
drivers door, and the gauges
illuminate when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.

Speedometer
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h) and/or miles per
hour (mph) depending on the type.
ODOMETER/TRIP METER/SEGMENT DISTANCE AND FUEL MILEAGE/ On some types, when the speed is
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
over approximately 120 km/h
(For some types) (75 mph), a buzzer sounds.
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.

ODOMETER/TRIP METER/ SELECT/RESET KNOB


SEGMENT DISTANCE AND FUEL MILEAGE

96 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:33 32SAA650_100

Gauges

Odometer/Trip Meter/Segment Odometer Segment Distance and Fuel Mileage


Distance and Fuel Mileage/ The odometer shows the total You can use this function to display
Outside Temperature distance of kilometers or miles your the distance and average fuel
The odometer, the trip meter, the vehicle has been driven. mileage for a segment of a trip.
segment distance and fuel mileage
and outside temperature (on some Trip Meter To display the segment distance and
types), use the same display. The trip meter shows the distance of fuel mileage, press and release the
To switch between the segment kilometers or miles driven since you Select/Reset knob. The Segment
display and the Trip Meter/ last reset it. Display will come on to remind you
Odometer display, press the Select/ that this is the segment distance and
Reset Knob. To reset a trip meter, display it and fuel mileage display.
When you turn the ignition switch to then press and hold the select/reset
the ON (II) position, what you last knob until the number resets to 0.0. For some types
selected is displayed. Fuel Mileage Display (mpg,
kilometers per liter, and in liters per
100 km) depends on models.

The segment distance and fuel


mileage will be automatically reset
when resetting the trip meter. The
display will reset if the vehicles bat-
tery goes dead or is disconnected.

Instruments and Controls 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:41 32SAA650_101

Gauges

Outside Temperature Indicator If the outside temperature is When it reaches the desired value,
(For some types) incorrectly displayed, you can adjust release the Select/Reset knob. You
This indicator displays the outside it up to 3C warmer or cooler. should see the new outside
temperature in Centigrade. temperature displayed.
NOTE: The temperature must be
The temperature sensor is located in stabilized before doing this In certain weather conditions,
the front bumper. Therefore, the procedure. temperature readings near freezing
temperature reading can be affected 0C could mean that ice is forming
by heat reflection from the road sur- Press the Select/Reset knob for 10 on the road surface.
face, engine heat, and the exhaust seconds. The following sequence will
from surrounding traffic. This can appear for one second each: 0, 1, 2, 3,
cause an incorrect temperature read- 3, 2, 1, 0.
ing when your speed is under
30 km/h (19 mph).

When you start your trip, the sensor


is not fully acclimatized, therefore it
may take several minutes until the
proper temperature is displayed.

98 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:48 32SAA650_102

Gauges

FUEL GAUGE Fuel Gauge


This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.

The needle returns to the bottom


after you turn off the ignition switch.
The gauge shows the fuel level
reading immediately after you turn
the ignition switch back to the ON
(II) position.
(For some types)

Avoid driving with an extremely low


fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

FUEL GAUGE

Instruments and Controls 99

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:23:56 32SAA650_103

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Left-hand drive type


HORN PAD1 INSTRUMENT PANEL HAZARD WARNING BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEMISTER
BRIGHTNESS2 (P.106) (P.106)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (P.103) HEATED DOOR MIRRORS2
(VSA) OFF SWITCH2 (P.138)
(P.265)

FOG LIGHTS2
(P.107/108)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.102/103)

MIRROR CONTROLS2
(P.138)
WINDSCREEN WIPERS/WASHERS
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER2 STEERING SHIFT (P.104/105)
(P.109) SWITCHES2 (P.256) AUXILIARY INPUT JACK2
(P.227)
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH2
(P.110) (P.255)

1: To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2: For some types
100 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:04 32SAA650_104

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Right-hand drive type


HAZARD WARNING BUTTON HORN PAD1 INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS2
(P.106) (P.103)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST


(VSA) OFF SWITCH2
(P.265)
WINDSCREEN WIPERS/ FOG LIGHTS2,3
WASHERS3 (P.107/108)
(P.104/105)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN
SIGNALS3 (P.102/103)
READ WINDOW
DEMISTER
(P.106) MIRROR CONTROLS2
HEATED DOOR (P.138)
MIRRORS
(P.138)

AUXILIARY INPUT STEERING SHIFT


JACK2 SWITCHES2 (P.256)
(P.227)
STEERING WHEEL 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH2 HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER2
ADJUSTMENT (P.110) (P.255) (P.109)

1: To use the horn, press the centre pad of the steering wheel.
2: For some types
3: On European models, these switches change locations with each other.
Instruments and Controls 101

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:11 32SAA650_105

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Headlights If you leave the lights on with the


key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
beeper when you open the drivers
door.

For some types


When the light switch is in either of
these positions, the Lights On
indicator comes on as a reminder
(see page 93 ).

The rotating switch on the lever To change from low beams to high
controls the lights. Turning this beams, push the turn signal lever
switch to the position turns forward until you hear a click. The
on the position lights, tail-lights, high beam indicator will come on
instrument panel lights, and rear (see page 94 ). To return to low
licence plate lights. Turning the beams, pull the turn signal lever
switch to the position turns back.
on the headlights.

102 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:19 32SAA650_106

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instrument Panel Brightness Turn Signals


(For some types)

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

To flash the high beams, pull the Signal a turn or lane change with this
turn signal lever back lightly, then The select/reset knob on the lever. Push down or up on the lever
release it. The high beams will come instrument panel controls the to signal a turn. If you push it up or
on and go off. brightness of the instrument panel down all the way, the turn signal
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the continues to blink even when you
The high beams will stay on for as brightness. release the lever. It shuts off auto-
long as you hold the lever back, no matically as you complete the turn.
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 103

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:27 32SAA650_107

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

To signal a lane change, push lightly Windscreen Wipers


on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the centre position as soon
as you release it.

This lever controls the windscreen In intermittent, the wipers operate


wipers and washers. It has five every few seconds. In low speed and
positions; high speed, the wipers run continu-
MIST: mist mode ously.
OFF: off
INT: intermittent To operate the wipers in mist mode,
LO: low speed push the control lever up from the
HI: high speed OFF position. The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
To select a position, push the lever This gives you a quick way to clear
up or down. the windscreen.

104 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:35 32SAA650_108

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Windscreen Washers Rear Window Wiper and Washer Turn and hold the switch one
position up from ON to to
activate the washer and wiper; or
turn and hold the switch one position
down from OFF to activate the
washer only.

The rear window washer uses the


same fluid reservoir as the wind-
screen washer.

To clean the windscreen, pull back Also, the lever controls the rear
on the wiper control lever. The window wiper and washer. The
washers spray until you release the rotary switch next to the windscreen
lever. wiper and washer switch is for the
rear window wiper and washer. Turn
On some types, the wipers run at low to ON to activate the rear window
speed while youre pulling the lever, wiper.
then complete one more sweep of
the windscreen after you release it. On some types, the rear window
wiper operates every seven seconds.

Instruments and Controls 105

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:43 32SAA650_109

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Hazard Warning Rear Window Demister The demister wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.

If you use the demister without the


engine running, the battery may run
out very quickly.

For some types


When the demister is on, the mirror
demister (see page 138 ) is on, too.

Push the red button to turn on the The rear window demister will clear
hazard warning lights (four-way fog, frost, and thin ice from the
flashers). This causes all outside window. Push the demister button to
turn signals and indicators in the turn it on and off. The indicator in
instrument panel to flash. Use these the button comes on to show the
lights to give a warning to other road demister is on.
users that your vehicle is causing a
hazard. Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.

106 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:24:53 32SAA650_110

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Rear Fog Light To operate the rear fog light, turn Front Fog Light
(For some types) the switch up from the off (OFF) (For some types)
position. The indicator in the
instrument panel comes on to
indicate that the rear fog light is on.

The rear fog light will go off when


you turn the headlights off. To turn
it on again, you have to click the
rotary switch again with the
headlights on.

The headlights will stay on when you


REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH turn the rear fog light off. In this FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
case, make sure the headlights are
The rear fog light switch is located off when you dont drive. The front fog light switch is located
next to the light control switch. You next to the light control switch. You
can use the rear fog light when the can use the front fog lights when the
headlights are on (the light control light control switch is in the or
switch is in the position). position.

To operate the front fog lights, turn


the switch up from the OFF position.
The indicator in the instrument
panel comes on to indicate that the
front fog lights are on.

Instruments and Controls 107

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:04 32SAA650_111

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Front and Rear Fog Lights To turn on the rear fog light only, The rear fog light will go off when
(For some types) turn the switch down from the off you turn the headlights off. The
( ) position. The indicator in front fog lights go off when the light
the instrument panel comes on to control switch is turned to the OFF
indicate that the rear fog light is on. position.
You can turn off the rear fog light
with the headlights on by turning the When you turn the light control
switch down again. switch on again, the front fog lights
will also turn on. To turn the fog
To operate the front fog lights, turn lights completely off, turn the fog
the switch up from the off ( ) light switch down to the off ( )
position to the position. The position.
indicator comes on as a
reminder. To turn the rear fog light To turn the rear fog light on again,
on with the front fog lights, turn the you have to turn the fog light switch
The fog light switch is located next switch one position up from the again with the headlights on
to the light control switch. You can position. ( position).
control the front and rear fog lights You can turn off the rear fog light
with this switch when the light with the front fog lights on by
control switch is in the or turning the switch up again.
position.

You can also use the rear fog light


when the light control switch is in
the position or the front fog
lights are turned on.

108 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:13 32SAA650_112

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Headlight Adjuster 0: A driver or a driver and passenger Steering Wheel Adjustment


(For some types) in the front seat. See page 20 for important safety
1: Five persons in the front and rear information about how to properly
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTER KNOB seats. position the steering wheel.
2: Five persons in the front and rear Make any steering wheel adjustment
seats and luggage in the luggage before you start driving.
area, within the limits of maximum
permissible vehicle weight.
3: A driver and luggage in the
luggage area, within the limits of Adjusting the steering wheel
maximum permissible axle weight position while driving may
and maximum permissible vehicle cause you to lose control of
weight. the vehicle and be seriously
injured in a crash.

The vertical angle of the headlights Adjust the steering wheel


(low beam) can be adjusted accord- only when the vehicle is
ing to the number of persons and the stopped.
loading weight in the luggage area.

Move the adjusting knob to select an


appropriate angle of the headlights.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 109

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:21 32SAA650_113

Controls Near the Steering Wheel, Keys and Locks

3. Push the lever up to lock the Keys


steering wheel in that position. Two ignition keys come with your
vehicle. You should keep one of
4. Make sure you have securely them in a safe place, away from the
locked the steering wheel in place vehicle, as a spare.
by trying to move it up and down.
They fit all the locks on your vehicle:
Ignition
Door(s)
Tailgate (for some types)

LEVER

To adjust the steering wheel upward


or downward:

1. Push the lever under the steering


column all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the


desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicators.

110 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:30 32SAA650_114

Keys and Locks

KEY NUMBER IGNITION KEYS


(On vehicles with immobilizer
KEY NUMBER IGNITION KEYS system)
TAG TAG WITH REMOTE
TRANSMITTER These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from direct


sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy


You should have received a key objects on them.
number tag with your keys. You will KEY NUMBER IGNITION KEY
need this key number if you ever TAG WITH REMOTE Keep the keys away from liquids.
TRANSMITTER
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep If they get wet, dry them
the tag stored in a safe place. If you immediately with a soft cloth.
need to replace a key, use only
Honda-approved key blanks. Remote Transmitter
On some types, your vehicle also
comes with one or two remote
transmitters depending on models;
see page 117 for an explanation of
IGNITION KEY
the operation.

Instruments and Controls 111

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:39 32SAA650_115

Keys and Locks

Immobilizer System recognizes the key code: your vehicle undriveable.


(For some types)
The Immobilizer System protects Do not keep other immobilizer If you have lost your key and you
your vehicle from theft. A properly- keys on the same key ring. cannot start the engine, contact your
coded ignition key must be used in dealer.
the ignition switch for the engine to Use a plastic or leather key fob,
start. If an improperly-coded key (or not metal. (EU models)
other device) is used, the engines EC Directives
fuel system is disabled. Keep other keys away from your This immobilizer system complies
vehicles key and the ignition with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
When you turn the ignition switch to switch while trying to start the and Telecommunications Terminal
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer engine. Equipment and the mutual
system indicator should come on for recognition of their conformity)
a few seconds, then go out. If the If the system repeatedly does not Directives.
indicator starts to blink, it means the recognize the coding of your key,
system does not recognize the contact your dealer.
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position, The immobilizer system indicator
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn will also blink several times when
the switch to the ON (II) position you turn the ignition switch from the
again. ON (II) position to the ACCESSORY
The system may not recognize your (I) or the LOCK (0) position.
keys coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the Do not attempt to alter this system
ignition switch when you insert the or add other devices to it. Electrical
key. To make sure the system problems could result that may make

112 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:47 32SAA650_116

Keys and Locks

Ignition Switch LOCK (0) You can insert or


remove the key only in this position.
To switch from the ACCESSORY (I) Removing the key from the
to the LOCK (0) position, you must ignition switch while driving
push the key in slightly as you turn it. locks the steering. This can
If your vehicle has an automatic cause you to lose control of
transmission (CVT), the shift lever the vehicle.
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column Remove the key from the
when you remove the key. ignition switch only when
parked.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from the ACCESSORY (I) In this position,
The ignition switch is on the right LOCK (0) to the ACCESSORY (I) you can operate the audio system
side of the steering column. It has position. Firmly turn the steering (on some types), the cigarette lighter
four positions: wheel to the left or to the right as and the accessory power socket.
LOCK (0) you turn the key.
ACCESSORY (I) ON (II) This is the normal key
ON (II) position when driving. All features
START (III) and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the indicators on
the instrument panel come on as a
test when you turn the ignition
switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to
the ON (II) position. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 113

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:25:55 32SAA650_117

Keys and Locks

START (III) Use this position Door Locks


only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when LOCK TAB
you let go of the key.

The engine will not start if the Unlock


immobilizer system does not recog-
nize the keys coding (see page 112 ).

On some types, you will hear a Lock


reminder beeper if you leave the key
in the ignition switch in the LOCK
(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position KEY
and open the drivers door. Remove
the key to turn off the beeper. Each door has a lock tab on the top. The front doors can be locked and
Push the tab down to lock the door unlocked from the outside with the
and pull it up to unlock. key.

To lock any passengers door when


getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down and close the door. To
lock the drivers door, pull the
outside door handle and push the
lock tab down. Release the handle,
then close the door.

114 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:04 32SAA650_118

Keys and Locks

Power Door Locks


(For some types) (For some types)
MASTER DOOR LOCK BUTTON LOCK TAB

Unlock

Lock

KEY

The drivers door has a master door Each door has a lock tab on the top. The front doors can be locked and
lock button. Push the master door When you push down or pull up the unlocked from the outside with the
lock button to lock all doors and the lock tab on the drivers door, all key. All doors and the tailgate lock
tailgate. Push the button again to doors and the tailgate lock or unlock. or unlock when you use the key to
unlock them. The lock tab on each passengers lock or unlock the drivers door.
door only locks and unlocks that
door.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 115

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:12 32SAA650_119

Keys and Locks

Lockout Prevention Super Locking The super locking will not set if any
If you forget and leave the key in the (For some types) door or the tailgate is not fully closed.
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention It will be set even if the bonnet, any
will not allow you to lock the drivers window or the sunroof is open.
door. With the drivers door open
and the key in the ignition, the With the super locking set, the
master door lock switch (on some master door lock switch on the
types) is disabled. However, if the drivers door and the lock tabs on all
drivers door is not open, the master doors are disabled.
door lock switch is not disabled. If
you try to lock an open drivers door
by pushing down the lock tab, the
tabs on all doors pop out. Pushing If there are persons inside the
down the lock tab on the front vehicle with the super
passengers door only locks that door. locking set, they cannot
The super locking helps to protect unlock the door from the
your vehicle and valuables from theft. inside.
To set the super locking, turn the
key towards the front of the vehicle Make sure there is no person
twice within 5 seconds. inside the vehicle before
setting the super locking.
You can also set the super locking
with the tailgate lock. Turn the key
twice to lock within 5 seconds.

116 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:19 32SAA650_120

Keys and Locks

On some types, you can set the Remote Transmitter When you push the UNLOCK button,
super locking with the remote (For some types) all doors and the tailgate unlock. All
transmitter. To set it, push the outside turn signals and both
LOCK button twice within 5 seconds LOCK indicators in the instrument panel
BUTTON
(see page 118 ). flash once each time you push the
button.
To reset the super locking, unlock
the drivers door or the tailgate with
the key or the remote transmitter.

UNLOCK
BUTTON

You can lock and unlock your vehicle


with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
and the tailgate lock.

When you push the LOCK button on


the remote transmitter, all outside
turn signals and both indicators in
the instrument panel flash three
times to verify the doors and the
tailgate are locked. CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 117

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:28 32SAA650_121

Keys and Locks

The ceiling light (if the ceiling light Super Locking


switch is in the centre position) will (For some types)
come on when you press the The super locking helps to protect If there are persons inside the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open your vehicle and valuables from theft. vehicle with the super
any door or the tailgate, the light will To set the super locking, push the locking set, they cannot
fade out in about 30 seconds. If you LOCK button twice within 5 seconds. unlock the door from the
relock the doors and the tailgate inside.
with the remote transmitter before The super locking will not set if any
30 seconds have elapsed, the light door or the tailgate is not fully closed. Make sure there is no person
will go off immediately. It will be set even if the bonnet, any inside the vehicle before
window or the sunroof is open. setting the super locking.
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter, To reset the super locking, push the
but do not open any door or the UNLOCK button on the remote
tailgate within 30 seconds, all doors transmitter, or unlock the drivers
and the tailgate automatically relock. door with the key.

You cannot lock or unlock the doors See page 116 for information on the
and the tailgate with the remote super locking.
transmitter if any door or the tailgate
is not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.

118 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:36 32SAA650_122

Keys and Locks

Replacing the Battery


When the remote transmitters
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and tailgate, BATTERY
and the LED will not light. Replace
the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616


SCREW

TAB

To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate


the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.

2. Separate the transmitter by prying


its middle seam with your
fingernail.

Instruments and Controls 119

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:45 32SAA650_123

Keys and Locks

4. Remove the old battery from the (EU models) Transmitter Care
back of the inner cover, and note EC Directives Avoid dropping or throwing the
the polarity. Make sure the This keyless entry system complies transmitter.
polarity of the new battery is the with the R & TTE (Radio equipment
same ( side facing down), then and Telecommunications Terminal Protect the transmitter from
insert it into the back of the cover. Equipment and the mutual extreme temperature.
recognition of their conformity)
This symbol on the battery Directives. Do not immerse the transmitter in
means that this product must any liquid.
not be treated as household
waste. If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.

An improperly disposed of battery


can be harmful to the environment
and human health.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

5. Install the parts in reverse order.

120 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:26:54 32SAA650_124

Keys and Locks

Childproof Door Locks Tailgate For some types


The tailgate will also lock or unlock
when you lock or unlock the drivers
door by using the lock tab, the key,
or the master door lock switch.

On vehicles with remote


transmitters, the tailgate will also
lock or unlock when you lock or
unlock the doors with the
transmitter.
LEVER KEY When you lock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
The childproof door locks are For some types all outside turn signals and both
designed to prevent children seated Use the key to lock or unlock the indicators in the instrument panel
in the rear from accidentally opening tailgate lock. flash three times to verify the doors
the rear doors. Each rear door has a and the tailgate are locked. When
lock lever near the edge. With the you unlock them, the lights flash
lever in the LOCK position, the door once.
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up and use the outside door
handle.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 121

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:02 32SAA650_125

Keys and Locks

COVER

TAILGATE
HANDLE HANDLE

To open the tailgate, pull the handle, To close the tailgate, hold the On vehicles with remote transmitter
then lift up the tailgate. tailgate handle and lower the tailgate, If the power door lock system cannot
then press down on the back edge. unlock the tailgate, unlock it
manually.
See page 241 for the information on
luggage loading. Keep the tailgate 1. Place a cloth on the edge of the
closed at all times while driving to cover, then use a small flat-tipped
avoid damaging the tailgate, and to screwdriver to remove the cover
prevent exhaust gas from getting on the back of the tailgate.
into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 79 .

122 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:09 32SAA650_126

Keys and Locks

Glove Box
COVER An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your
passenger in a crash, even if
the passenger is wearing the
seat belt.

Always keep the glove box


closed while driving.

LEVER GLOVE BOX

2. Turn the inside lever right to Open the glove box by pushing the
unlock the tailgate. handle. Close it with a firm push.

If you need to unlock the tailgate


manually, it means there is a
problem with the tailgate. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.

Instruments and Controls 123

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:16 32SAA650_127

Seats

Front Seat Adjustments


See pages 15 17 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.

Make all seat adjustments before


you start driving.

LEVER LEVER

To adjust the seat forward and On some types, the seat can also be
backward, pull up on the lever under adjusted forward and backward
the seat cushions front edge. Move using the lever on the side of the
the seat to the desired position and seat-back. Pull out the lever and push
release the lever. Try to move the it forward holding the seat-back with
seat to make sure it is locked in your hand. Move the seat to the
position. desired position and check the seat
to make sure it is locked in position.

124 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:26 32SAA650_128

Seats

Drivers Seat Height Adjustment Head Restraints


See page 17 for important safety
DIAL information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.

Your vehicle has adjustable head


restraints on the front seats. The
rear seat also has head restraints on
the outside positions, but they are
not adjustable.
LEVER
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
To change the angle of the seat-back, and other injuries.
pull up on the lever on the outside of See pages 15 17 for important safety
the seat bottom. Move the seat-back information and warnings about how to
to the desired position and release properly position the seats and seat-
the lever. Let the seat-back latch into backs.
the new position.
The height of your drivers seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to change
the height.
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 125

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:33 32SAA650_129

Seats

FRONT RELEASE REAR CENTRE


BUTTON
RELEASE
BUTTON

They are most effective when you The front head restraints adjust for On vehicles with rear centre head
adjust them so the back of the height. You need both hands to restraint
occupants head rests against the adjust the restraint. Do not attempt The rear centre head restraint
centre of the restraint. A taller to adjust it while driving. To raise it, adjusts for height. You need both
person should adjust the restraint as pull upward. To lower the restraint, hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
high as possible. push the release button sideways attempt to adjust it while driving. To
and push the restraint down. raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
To remove the front or rear outside sideways and push the restraint
head restraint for cleaning or repair, down.
pull it up as far as it will go. Push the
release button and pull the restraint
out of the seat-back.

126 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:43 32SAA650_130

Seats

To remove the rear centre head Folding the Rear Seats


restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it The left and right rear seat cushions
up as far as it will go. Push the can be lifted up separately.
release button and pull the restraint
out of the seat-back. Make sure there are no items on the
floor before folding down the seats.
Always replace the rear head
restraints when the seat-backs are This label on the back of
returned to upright position. rear seats guides you to
refer to the Owners Manual for
correct operation.

Failure to reinstall the head Only on vehicles equipped with lap belt
restraints can result in severe When lifting the rear seat cushion up, Lift the rear seat cushion up and fold
injury during a crash. store the lap belt in the pocket in the the leg down. Push the seat cushion
rear seat back (see page 129 ). firmly against the seat-back to lock it.
Always replace the head
restraints before driving.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 127

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:51 32SAA650_131

Seats

Create the Luggage Space


LEG For greater luggage capacity, the
rear seat can be folded down.

Make sure there are no items on the


floor before folding down the seats.

The left and right halves of the rear


seat can be folded up separately.

FLOOR GUIDE LEVER

To return the seat cushion to its Before folding down the rear seat-
original position, unfold the legs and back, move the front seat to the
lower it slowly holding the seat forward most position (see page
cushion with your hands. Set the 124 ).
legs in the floor guides and make
sure they are securely locked into
place.

128 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:27:59 32SAA650_132

Seats

(For some types)

LEVER
LEVER
On some types, the seat can also be
adjusted forward and backward When folding the rear seat, store the Pull the release lever up to unlatch
using the lever on the side of the belt in the pocket in the rear seat- the seat-back. Move the seat belt out
seat-back. Pull out the lever and push back. of the way and fold the seat-back
it forward holding the seat-back with down holding it with your hands.
your hand. Move the seat to the
forward most position and check the Before returning the rear seat-back
seat to make sure it is locked in to the upright position, move the
position. front seat to the forward most
position.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 129

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:05 32SAA650_133

Seats

LEG

FLOOR GUIDE

To lock the seat-back upright, lift the To return the seat cushion to its
seat-back and the seat bottom up, original position, unfold the legs and
push them firmly against the latch. lower it slowly holding the seat
Tug on the seat-back to ensure that cushion with your hands. Set the
it is latched. legs in the floor guides and make
sure they are securely locked into
place.

Adjust the front seat position.

130 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:12 32SAA650_134

Seats

Detachable Anchor SMALL LATCH RETRACTOR


(For some types) PLATE HOUSING SMALL LATCH
The seat belt in the rear centre seat ANCHOR PLATE
is equipped with a detachable anchor. BUCKLE
This allows the centre seat belt to be
unlatched when the right side of the
rear seat is folded.

Using the seat belt with the TRIANGLE MARKS


detachable anchor unlatched LATCH PLATE
increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a To unlatch the detachable anchor When the seat-back is returned to its
crash. before folding the seat-back, insert upright position, be sure to latch the
the latch plate into the slot on the detachable anchor by lining up the
Before using the seat belt, side of the anchor buckle and allow triangle marks on the small latch
make sure the detachable the seat belt to retract. Store the plate and anchor buckle, then insert
anchor is correctly latched. small latch plate and seat belt latch the plate into the buckle. Tug on the
plate in the retractor housing. seat belt to verify that the detachable
anchor is securely latched. Make
sure the seat belt is not twisted.

Instruments and Controls 131

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:20 32SAA650_135

Tonneau Cover (For some types)

MOUNTING ROD

TONNEAU COVER SLOT

1. Release the left side of the 3. To use the tonneau cover, place To extend the rear side tonneau
tonneau cover by pushing the left the left edge into the holder and cover, pull the covers leading edge
edge of the unit toward the right push the edge inward and push out of its housing and set the
edge and lifting it up. the right edge down into its holder mounting rods in the slots at both
until it locks into place. sides of the tailgate opening.
2. Refer to page 127 for the folding
of the rear seat. Make sure it is securely latched so it
will not come loose while you are
driving.

132 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:25 32SAA650_136

Tonneau Cover (For some types)

To retract the cover, release the rods The tonneau cover may be removed
from the slots and guide the cover so to give you more luggage space.
it rolls back fully into its housing.
Reverse the installation procedure to
Do not store parcels on the tonneau store the tonneau cover.
cover. The tonneau cover may break
if weight is placed on it.

Instruments and Controls 133

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:31 32SAA650_137

Power Windows (For some types)

All four windows (on some types, DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH


two front windows) are electrically-
powered. Turn the ignition switch to Closing a power window on
the ON (II) position to raise or lower someones hands or fingers
any window. can cause serious injury.

Each door has a switch that controls Make sure your passengers
its window. To open the window, are away from the windows
push the switch down and hold it. before closing them.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the WARNING: Always take the ignition MAIN SWITCH
switch and holding it. key with you whenever you leave the
The rear door windows open only vehicle alone (with other occupants). The drivers door armrest has a
halfway. master power window control panel.
To open any of the passengers win-
dows, push down on the appropriate
switch and hold it until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.

134 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:39 32SAA650_138

Power Windows (For some types)

The master control panel also con- The MAIN switch controls power to Auto Reverse
tains these extra features: the passengers windows. When you On vehicles with drivers window auto
push in the MAIN switch, the feature
AUTO To open and, on some passengers windows cannot be If the drivers window senses any
types, also to close the drivers raised or lowered. The MAIN switch obstacle while it is closing with the
window fully, push down or pull back does not affect the drivers window. AUTO feature, the window will stop
on the window switch firmly and To cancel this feature, push on the and then automatically begin to
release it. The window automatically switch again to get it to pop out. lower itself.
goes all the way up or down. To stop Keep the MAIN switch pushed in
the window from going all the way, when you have children in the Even with this feature, you should
pull back on the window switch if it vehicle so they do not injure them- still check that all passengers and
is opening or push down if it is selves by operating the windows objects are away from the window
closing. To open or close the drivers unintentionally. before closing it. This feature is not
window only partially, push down or functional when the window is very
pull back on the window switch The lights inside the switches come close to the fully raised position.
lightly and hold it. The window will on when you turn the ignition switch
stop as soon as you release the to the ON (II) position.
switch.

CONTINUED

Instruments and Controls 135

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:47 32SAA650_139

Power Windows (For some types), Sunroof

Any impact due to road conditions If your vehicles battery is Sunroof


may cause the auto reverse function disconnected or goes dead, or the (For some types)
to work unexpectedly on the closing drivers window fuse is removed, the
window. If it happens frequently, AUTO feature of the drivers window OPEN/CLOSE SWITCH
there is a problem with your power will be disabled. The power window
window system. You should have system needs to be reset after
your vehicle inspected by your reconnecting the battery or installing
dealer. You can still close the the fuse. You should do the following.
window by pulling back on the
window switch lightly and holding it. 1. Start the engine. Push down on
the drivers window switch until
the window is fully open.

2. Pull back on the drivers window TILT-UP SWITCH


switch to close the window
completely and hold the switch for There are two switches on the
a further second. ceiling near the front ceiling light.
The ignition switch must be in the
If the power windows do not operate ON (II) position.
properly after resetting, have your To open the sunroof, pull the OPEN/
vehicle checked by your dealer. CLOSE switch backward. Push the
switch forward to close it.
When you push the TILT-UP switch,
rear of the sunroof will tilt up. To tilt
it down, push the OPEN/CLOSE
switch forward.

136 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:28:55 32SAA650_140

Sunroof, Mirrors

(For some types) Mirrors


If you push and hold the sunroof
Opening or closing the switch to close the sunroof fully, the
sunroof on someones hands sunroof automatically stops at a
or fingers can cause serious preset position. Release the switch
injury. once, and push it forward again to
close the sunroof completely.
Make sure all hands and
fingers are clear of the WARNING: Extending the head, arms TAB
sunroof before opening or or other parts of the body through the
closing it. sunroof while the vehicle is moving can
cause serious injury or death.

Keep the inside and outside mirrors


If you try to open the sunroof in clean and adjusted for best visibility.
below-freezing temperatures, or Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
when it is covered with snow or ice, you start driving.
you can damage the sunroof panel or
motor. The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
WARNING: Always take the ignition glare from headlights behind you.
key with you whenever you leave the Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
vehicle alone (with other occupants). the mirror to select the day or night
position.

Instruments and Controls 137

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:06 32SAA650_141

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Heated Door Mirrors


(For some types)
MIRROR DEMISTER BUTTON

SELECTOR SWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH


On some types, the outside mirrors
Adjust the outside mirrors with the 3. Push the appropriate edge of the are heated to remove fog and frost.
adjustment switch on the drivers adjustment switch to move the Press the demister button to turn on
side of the dashboard: mirror right, left, up, or down. the heaters when the ignition switch
is in the ON (II) position. The light in
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 4. When you finish, move the the button comes on as a reminder.
ON (II) position. selector switch to the centre (off) Press the button again to turn the
2. Move the selector switch to L (left position. This turns off the heaters off.
side) or R (right side). adjustment switch so you cant
move a mirror out of position by When the demister is on, the rear
accidentally bumping the switch. window demister (see page 106 ) is
on, too.

138 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:14 32SAA650_142

Mirrors, Sun Visor

Folding Door Mirrors Never drive your vehicle with the Sun Visor
(For some types) outside mirrors folded.
FOLDING SWITCH

To use the sun visor, pull it down.


Door mirrors can be folded by the You can also use the sun visor at the
folding switch next to the selector side window. Remove the support
switch, which enables you to park rod from the clip and swing the sun
your vehicle in a limited parking visor toward the side window.
space easily. Make sure to fold out
the mirrors before you start driving. Make sure you put the sun visor
With the ignition switch is in the ON back in place when you are getting
(II) position, press the folding switch into or out of the vehicle.
to fold up both outside mirrors simul-
taneously. To fold out, press the
switch again.

Instruments and Controls 139

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:20 32SAA650_143

Vanity Mirror, Parking Brake

Vanity Mirror Parking Brake

Driving the vehicle with the parking


brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.

VANITY MIRROR PARKING BRAKE LEVER

To use a vanity mirror on the back of To apply the parking brake, pull the
the sun visor, pull up the cover. lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page 95 ).

140 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:28 32SAA650_144

Coat Hook, Beverage Holder

Coat Hook Beverage Holder


(For some types)
GRAB RAIL

COAT HOOK
Be careful when you are using the The beverage holders for the rear
The rear seat grab rails can also be beverage holder. A spilled liquid that passengers are located on the upper-
used as coat hook. is very hot can scald you or your rear section of the centre console.
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
This hook is not designed for large damage the upholstery, carpeting,
or heavy items. and electrical components in the
interior.

Instruments and Controls 141

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:36 32SAA650_145

Cigarette Lighter, Ashtray

Cigarette Lighter Ashtray


(For some types) (For some types)
Use the ashtray only for cigarettes,
cigars, and other smoking materials.
To prevent a possible fire and
damage to your vehicle, dont put
paper or other things that can burn
in the ashtray.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER ASHTRAY

The ignition switch must be in the To use the front ashtray, swing the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) lid open. To remove it, pull it straight
position for the cigarette lighter to up with lid closed.
work. To heat up the lighter, push it
in. It will pop out when it is ready for
use. Do not hold the lighter in while
it is heating up, you could cause it to
overheat.

142 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:44 32SAA650_146

Accessory Power Socket

Accessory Power Socket It will not power an automotive type If used without the engine running,
(For some types) cigarette lighter element. the battery may run out very quickly.

It is recommended that only genuine Always put the cover on when not in
Honda Accessories are used for this use in order to prevent objects
socket. Improper accessories may entering into the socket.
Pull up cause problems.

To use the accessory power socket,


pull the cover up. The ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
the ON (II) position.

This socket is intended to supply


power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

Instruments and Controls 143

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:29:53 32SAA650_147

Luggage Hooks, Interior Lights

Luggage Hooks Spotlights Individual Map Lights


(For some types) (For some types)
HOOK

The hooks on the floor of the


luggage area enable you to tie down The front ceiling light also contains Turn on each individual map light by
items stored in the back. Make sure two spotlights. pushing the lens. Push the lens again
all stored items are secured before to turn it off. You can use the
driving. Turn on the spotlight by pushing the individual map lights at all times.
button next to each light. Push the
button again to turn it off. You can
use the spotlights at all times.

144 Instruments and Controls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:01 32SAA650_148

Interior Lights

Ceiling Light Luggage Area Light


Front DOOR ACTIVATED Rear DOOR ACTIVATED

ON
OFF

ON OFF

Each ceiling light has a three- The front and rear ceiling lights The luggage area light comes on
position switch. In the OFF position, (with each switch in the centre when you open the tailgate.
the light does not come on. In the position) come on when you unlock
centre position, the ceiling light the door with the key or the remote
comes on when you open any door. transmitter (see page 117 ).
After all doors are closed tightly, the
light goes out. On some types, the The ceiling lights (with each switch
light fades out in about six seconds. in the centre position) will also come
In the ON position, the ceiling light on when you remove the key from
stays on continuously. the ignition switch. If you do not
open a door, the lights stay on, then
fade out in about 30 seconds.

Instruments and Controls 145

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:04 32SAA650_149

146

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:08 32SAA650_150

Comfort and Convenience Features

The heating and air conditioning Heating and Cooling ..................... 148
systems in your vehicle provide a What Each Control Does .......... 148
comfortable driving environment in How to Use the System............. 152
all weather conditions. To Turn Everything Off ........... 156
Climate Control System ................ 157

Air conditioning is standard on Fully-automatic Operation ........ 160
some models. Semi-automatic Operation ........ 161
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
The audio system that is standard Sensor ..................................... 166
equipment on some models has Audio System ................................. 167
many features. This section de- Audio System (A type) .................. 169
scribes those features and how to Audio System (B type) .................. 180
use them. (If you selected an Audio System (C type) .................. 197
optional audio system, refer to the Audio System (D type) ................. 214
operating instructions that came Protecing Compact Discs ......... 225
with it.) Remote Audio Controls ............ 226
Auxiliary Input Jack................... 227

Comfort and Convenience Features 147

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:18 32SAA650_151

Heating and Cooling

Proper use of the heating and


cooling system can make the interior AIR CONDITIONING FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION REAR WINDOW
BUTTON LEVER DEMISTER BUTTON
dry and comfortable, and keep the
windows clear for the best visibility.

If your vehicle does not have air


conditioning, it can be installed at
any time. Your dealer can install a
genuine Honda air conditioning
system that meets Hondas high
quality standards and is designed to
exactly fit your vehicle. Please
contact your dealer for more
information.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FAN CONTROL MODE CONTROL
What Each Control Does DIAL DIAL DIAL

Fan Control Dial Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Rear Window Demister Button
Turning this dial clockwise increases (For some types) This button turns the rear window
the fans speed, which increases air This button turns the air condi- demister on and off (see page 106 ).
flow. tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
in the button lights when the A/C is
Temperature Control Dials on.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.

148 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:30 32SAA650_152

Heating and Cooling

Fresh Air/Recirculation Lever Air flows from the centre


This lever controls the source of the and corner vents in the dashboard.
air going into the system. When you
select the side, air is brought Air flow is divided between
in from outside the vehicle (Fresh the vents in the dashboard and the
Air mode). When you select the floor vents.
side, air from the vehicles
interior is sent through the system Air flows from the floor
again (Recirculation mode). vents.

Mode Control Dial Air flow is divided between


This dial lets you select which vents the floor vents and the demister
the air flows from. Some air will flow vents at the base of the windscreen.
from the dashboard corner vents in
all modes. Air flows from the demister
vents at the base of the windscreen.

When you use or


, set the Fresh Air/
Recirculation Lever to the
side.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 149

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:34 32SAA650_153

Heating and Cooling

150 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:41 32SAA650_154

Heating and Cooling

Vent Controls
CENTRE VENTS DRIVERS SIDE VENT PASSENGERS SIDE VENT
TABS

Close
Close
Open Open

The direction of air flow from the The vents in the corners of the
vents in the centre and each side of dashboard can be opened and closed
the dashboard is adjustable. with the dials underneath them.

To adjust the air flow from each vent,


move the vent up-and-down and side-
to-side by the tab.

Comfort and Convenience Features 151

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:51 32SAA650_155

Heating and Cooling

How to Use the System It is best to leave the system in Fresh Ventilation
This section covers how to set up the Air mode under almost all conditions. The flow-through ventilation system
system controls for ventilation, Keeping the system in Recirculation draws in outside air, circulates it
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and mode, particularly with the A/C off, through the interior, then exhausts it
defrosting. can cause the windows to fog up. through vents near the tailgate.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
The engine must be running for the you are driving through smoky or 1. Turn the temperature control dial
heater and air conditioning to dusty conditions, then switch back to all the way to the left.
generate hot and cold air. The heater Fresh Air mode when the conditions Make sure the A/C is off.
uses engine coolant to warm the air. clear. 2. Select and Fresh Air mode.
If the engine is cold, it will be several 3. Set the fan to the desired speed.
minutes before you feel warm air The outside air intakes for the
coming from the system. heating and cooling system are at To Cool with A/C
the base of the windscreen. Keep (For some types)
The air conditioning does not rely on these clear of leaves and other 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
engine temperature. debris. button. The light in the button
comes on when a fan speed is
selected.
2. Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
3. Select .
4. If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.

152 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:30:58 32SAA650_156

Heating and Cooling

If the interior is very warm from


AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON REAR WINDOW
being parked in the sun, you can cool DEMISTER BUTTON
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way: FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER

1. Start the engine.


2. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the tempera-
ture control dial is set to maximum
cool.
3. Set the fan to maximum speed.
4. Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.

When the interior has cooled down


to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE CONTROL DIAL


DIAL

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 153

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:08 32SAA650_157

Heating and Cooling

Air conditioning places an extra load To Heat and Dehumidify with To Defog and Defrost
on the engine. Watch the High Air Conditioning To remove fog from the inside of the
Temperature Indicator (see page (For some types) windows:
95 ) when driving in stop-and-go Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill. moisture from the air. When used in 1. Switch the fan on.
If the indicator begins to blink, turn combination with the heater, it 2. Turn on the air conditioning (on
off the A/C until the indicator goes makes the interior warm and dry. some types).
off. 3. Select and Fresh Air mode.
1. Switch the fan on. 4. Adjust the temperature control
To Heat 2. Turn on the air conditioning. dial so the air flow from the
To warm the interior: 3. Select and Fresh Air mode. defroster vents feels warm.
4. Adjust the temperature control 5. Turn on the rear window demister
1. Start the engine. dial so the mixture of heated and to help clear the rear window.
2. Select and Fresh Air mode. cooled air feels comfortable.
3. Set the fan to the desired speed.
4. Adjust the warmth of the air with This setting is suitable for all driving
the temperature control dial. conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 0C (32F).

154 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:14 32SAA650_158

Heating and Cooling

To remove exterior frost or ice from


AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON REAR WINDOW
the windscreen and side windows DEMISTER BUTTON
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather: FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER

1. Start the engine.


2. Select the Fresh Air mode and
.
3. Switch the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost or


ice from the windscreen (on very
cold days), first select the Recircu-
lation mode. Once the windscreen is
clear, select the Fresh Air mode to
avoid fogging the windows.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL FAN CONTROL DIAL MODE CONTROL DIAL


DIAL

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 155

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:20 32SAA650_159

Heating and Cooling

These settings direct all the air flow To Turn Everything Off
to the demister vents at the base of To shut off the system temporarily,
the windscreen and the side window turn the fan speed and temperature
demister vents. The air flow will get control dials all the way to the left.
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can You should shut the system
close the side vents with the dial completely off only for the first few
underneath each vent. This will send minutes of driving in cold weather,
more warm air to the windscreen until the engine coolant warms up
demister vents. enough to operate the heater. Keep
the fan on at all other times so stale
For safety, make sure you have a air does not build up in the interior.
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.

156 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:27 32SAA650_160

Climate Control System

Only on vehicles with automatic air CENTRE VENTS DRIVERS SIDE VENT
conditioning system
The automatic climate control
system in your vehicle picks the
proper combination of air
conditioning, heating, and ventilation
to maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
Close
Open

TABS

The direction of air flow from the The vents in the corners of the
vents in the centre and each side of dashboard can be opened and closed
the dashboard is adjustable. with the dials underneath them.

To adjust the air flow from each vent,


move the vent up-and-down and side-
to-side by the tab.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 157

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:32 32SAA650_161

Climate Control System

PASSENGERS SIDE VENT The climate control system draws air For the climate control system to
through the exterior vents at the provide heating and cooling, the
bottom of the windscreen. Keep engine must be running.
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.

Close Open

158 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:36 32SAA650_162

Climate Control System

Comfort and Convenience Features 159

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:41 32SAA650_163

Climate Control System

Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate DISPLAY
Control in fully-automatic mode, AUTO BUTTON AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTON
press the AUTO button, then set the
desired temperature by pressing the OFF BUTTON
temperature control switch. You will
see FULL AUTO in the systems
display.

The system automatically selects the


proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.

TEMPERATURE FAN CONTROL SWITCH


CONTROL SWITCH

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

160 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:50 32SAA650_164

Climate Control System

When you set the temperature to its Semi-automatic Operation Recirculation Button
lower limit or its upper You can manually select various This button controls the source of
limit , the system runs at functions of the Climate Control the air going into the system. When
full cooling or heating only. It does system when it is in fully-automatic the indicator in this button is lit, the
not regulate the interior temperature. mode. All other features remain auto- system is recirculating the interior
matically controlled. Making any (Recirculation mode). When the
In cold weather, the fan will not manual selection causes the light indicator is off, air is brought in from
come on automatically until the above the AUTO button to go out. outside of the vehicle (Fresh Air
vehicle has been driven for a short mode).
time and the heater starts to develop Air Conditioning (A/C) Button You can, for example, manually put
warm air. Press the A/C button to turn the air the system in recirculation mode
conditioning on and off. When the when driving through an area of
Pressing the OFF button shuts the A/C is on, the indicator in the button smoke or fumes.
climate control system completely lights.
off. No air flow can cause the
windows to fog up. It is When you turn the A/C off, the
recommended that you keep the fan system cannot regulate the inside
on at all times so stale air and temperature if you set the dial below
moisture do not build up in the the outside temperature. With the
interior and cause fogging. A/C off, use the temperature control
switch to adjust the temperature of
the air flow to a comfortable setting.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 161

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:31:56 32SAA650_165

Climate Control System

Fan Control Switch


You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing the fan control MODE BUTTON
switch: to increase the fans speed,
or to decrease the fans speed.

Mode Button
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes; you can turn it off
with the dial below each vent. Each
time you press the MODE button,
the display shows the mode selected.
Press the button four times to see all
the modes.

DISPLAY FAN CONTROL SWITCH

162 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:02 32SAA650_166

Climate Control System

The main air flow is divided


between the floor vents and
defroster vents at the base of the
windscreen.

The main air flow is directed


to the floor vents.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 163

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:08 32SAA650_167

Climate Control System

Air flow is divided between


the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.

The air flow comes out of


the dashboard vents.

164 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:15 32SAA650_168

Climate Control System

The button directs the main


air flow to the windscreen for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/C


turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fan speed to high. You can also
increase air flow to the windscreen
by closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
BUTTON
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.

Rear Window Demister Button


This button turns the rear window
demister on and off (see page 106 ).

DISPLAY REAR WINDOW DEMISTER


BUTTON

Comfort and Convenience Features 165

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:20 32SAA650_169

Climate Control System

Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

To regulate the interior temperature,


the system has two sensors. A sun-
light sensor is located in the top of
the dashboard and a temperature
sensor is next to the steering column.
Do not cover the sensors or spill any
liquid on them.

166 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:28 32SAA650_170

Audio System

The audio system is in principle


available as an option. (A Type)

Some models may have one of the


audio systems described in this
section. Read the appropriate pages
in this section for operation of the
audio systems installed in your
vehicle.

page 169 to 179 for A type


page 180 to 196 for B type
page 197 to 213 for C type (B Type)
page 214 to 222 for D type

If your vehicle has a different audio


system from these types, read the
radio manufacturers manual that
came with your vehicle for its
operation.

These illustrations are left handle


models.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 167

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:32 32SAA650_171

Audio System

(C Type)

(D Type)

168 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:41 32SAA650_172

Audio System (A Type)

Your audio system provides clear FM/AM BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR


reception on each band while the SOUND SCAN BUTTON
preset buttons allow you to easily INDICATOR
select your favourite stations.

Operating the Radio


A.SEL BUTTON
The ignition switch must be in the
ST INDICATOR
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) CD BUTTON
A.SEL INDICATOR
position to operate the audio system.
AUX BUTTON PRESET
Turn the system on by pushing the INDICATORS
VOL/PWR knob, the FM/AM VOL/PWR PRESET
KNOB BUTTONS
button, the CD button or the AUX
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the knob. DISP BUTTON SEEK BAR TUNE BAR

The band and frequency that the You can use any of five methods to
radio was last tuned to is displayed. find radio stations on the selected
To change bands, press the FM/AM band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
button. On the UKW (FM) band, ST SELECT, and the preset buttons.
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. ST will flash
if you are driving in an area where
the radio signal is weak. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 169

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:50 32SAA650_173

Audio System (A Type)

TUNE Use the TUNE bar to tune SCAN The SCAN function To store a frequency:
the radio to a desired frequency. samples all the stations with strong
Push the TUNE bar to tune to a signals on the selected band. To 1. Select the desired band.
higher frequency, or to tune to a activate it, press the SCAN button,
lower frequency. Push the bar or then release it. The system will scan 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
until the display reaches the up the band for a station with a function to tune the radio to a
desired frequency. strong signal. When it finds one, it desired station.
will stop and play that station for
SEEK The SEEK function approximately 10 seconds. If you do 3. Pick the preset button you want
searches the band for a station with nothing, the system will then scan for that station. Press the button
a strong signal. To activate it, push for the next strong station and play and hold it until you hear a beep.
the SEEK bar or , then release that for 10 seconds. When it plays a
it. Depending on which part of the station that you want to continue 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
SEEK bar you press, the system listening to, press the SCAN button of six stations on AM and twelve
scans upward or downward from the again. on FM.
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal. Preset You can store the Once a stations frequency is stored,
frequencies of your favourite radio simply press and release the proper
stations in the six preset buttons. preset button to tune to it.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two The preset frequencies will be lost if
frequencies on the FM band. your vehicles battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the audio fuse is
removed.

170 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:32:57 32SAA650_174

Audio System (A Type)

AUTO SELECT If you are FM/AM BUTTON A.SEL BUTTON


travelling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
A.SEL
To activate AUTO SELECT, press INDICATOR
the A. SEL button. A. SEL will AUX BUTTON
flash in the display, and the system
will go into scan mode for several
seconds. It automatically scans both
bands, looking for stations with PRESET BUTTONS
strong signals. It stores the
frequencies of six AM stations and With Auto Select on, you can Auto Select does not erase the
twelve FM stations in the preset manually store any frequencies in frequencies that you preset
buttons. You can then use the preset the preset buttons. previously. When you return home,
buttons to select those stations. turn off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
If you are in a remote area, Auto will then select the frequencies you
Select may not find six strong AM originally set.
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a 0
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.

Comfort and Convenience Features 171

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:05 32SAA650_175

Audio System (A Type)

Adjusting the Sound


Bass, Treble, Fader, and Balance are DISP BUTTON SOUND H BUTTON
each adjustable. You select which of INDICATOR
these you want to adjust by pressing
the SOUND button. The mode
changes from BAS to TRE to FAD to
BAL, and then back to the selected
audio mode, each time you press the
SOUND button. Each mode is shown
in the display as it changes. VOL/PWR
KNOB R BUTTON
Balance/Fader These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back SOUND BUTTON M BUTTON
strength.
Treble/Bass Use these modes to As you adjust a mode, you will hear a
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the adjust the tone to your liking. Select beep whenever the adjustment level
SOUND button. Adjust the Balance TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND reaches the centre, maximum, or
or Fader to your liking by turning button. Adjust the desired mode by minimum of its range. The system
the VOL/PWR knob. The turning the VOL/PWR knob. The will automatically return the display
adjustment level is shown on the adjustment level is shown on the to normal mode about 5 seconds
display. display. after you stop adjusting a mode with
the VOL/PWR knob.

172 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:14 32SAA650_176

Audio System (A Type)

Digital Clock You can use the R (Preset 6) button DISPLAY When operating the
The display of your audio system to quickly set the time to the nearest audio system, you can choose to
usually shows the time when the hour. Press the R (Preset 6) button. display the sound indicator or the
ignition switch is in the If the displayed time is before the volume indicator by pressing the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) half hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets DISP button.
position. the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half With a disc playing, you can choose
To set the time, press the SOUND hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets the to display the track number or the
button for more than 2 seconds. You clock forward to the beginning of the play time by pressing the DISP
will hear a beep, and the time display next hour. button for more than 2 seconds.
will begin blinking.
For example:
To set the hours, press and hold the 1:06 would RESET to 1:00
H (Preset 4) button until the hour 1:52 would RESET to 2:00
advances to the desired time.
If your vehicles battery is
To set the minutes, press and hold disconnected or goes dead, the time
the M (Preset 5) button until the setting will be lost. To set the time
numbers advance to the desired time. again, follow the setting procedure.

Comfort and Convenience Features 173

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:23 32SAA650_177

Audio System (A Type)

Operating the CD Player


You operate the CD player with the FM/AM BUTTON SCAN/RPT BUTTON
same controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch in the


ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) EJECT RDM BUTTON
position, insert the disc into the CD BUTTON
RDM INDICATOR
slot. Push the disc in halfway, the CD RPT INDICATOR
drive will pull it in the rest of the way BUTTON
and begin to play. The number of the
track that is playing is shown in the AUX
display. BUTTON

You can also play 8-cm (3-in) discs


SEEK/SKIP BAR TUNE BAR
without using an adapter ring. You
should not try to use an adapter ring. VOL/PWR KNOB SCAN INDICATOR
This may cause the audio system to
damage or malfunction. In all cases, play only standard round When the system reaches the end of
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the disc, it will return to the begin-
For best results when using CD-R/ the drive or cause other problems. ning and play the disc again.
CD-RW discs, use only high quality
discs labelled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R/CD-RW, the
recording must be closed in order Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
for the disc to be used by CD players. The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

174 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:30 32SAA650_178

Audio System (A Type)

You can switch to the radio while a You can use the TUNE bar or the Each time you push and release the
CD is playing by pressing the FM/ SEEK/SKIP bar while a disc is SEEK/SKIP bar , the system skips
AM button. Press the CD button to playing to select passages or to forward to the beginning of the next
return to playing the CD. The CD change tracks. track. Push and release to skip
will begin playing where it left off. backward to the beginning of the
To move rapidly within a track, push current track. Push it again to skip to
If you turn the system off while a CD and hold the TUNE bar or the the beginning of the previous track.
is playing, either with the VOL/PWR SEEK/SKIP bar. Push and hold to
knob or by turning off the ignition move forward. Press and hold to With a disc playing, you can use the
switch, the disc will stay in the drive. move backward. Release the bar REPEAT, RANDOM and SCAN
When you turn the system back on, when the system reaches the point functions.
the CD will begin playing where it you want.
left off.

Press the EJECT button to remove


the disc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do not


remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 10 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 175

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:36 32SAA650_179

Audio System (A Type)

REPEAT To activate the Repeat SCAN This feature, when Protecting Compact Discs
feature, press the SCAN/RPT button activated, samples all the tracks on For information on how to handle
for more than 2 seconds. You will the CD in the order they are and protect compact discs, see page
see RPT in the display. The system recorded on the CD. To activate the 225 .
continuously replays the current Scan feature, select the Scan mode
track. Press the SCAN/RPT button by pressing the SCAN/RPT button.
for more than 2 seconds again to You will see SCAN in the display.
turn it off. The system will then play the first
track approximately 10 seconds. If
RANDOM PLAY This feature, you do nothing, the system will then
when activated, plays the tracks on play the following tracks for 10
the CD in random order, rather than seconds each. When it plays a track
in the order they are recorded on the that you want to continue listening to,
CD. To activate Random Play, press press the SCAN/RPT button again.
and release the RDM button. You After all tracks on that disc are
will see RDM in the display. The sampled, the SCAN mode is
system will then select and play cancelled. Pressing the SCAN/RPT
tracks randomly. This continues button again will also deactivate this
until you deactivate Random Play by feature.
pressing RDM again.

176 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:42 32SAA650_180

Audio System (A Type)

CD Player Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the vehicle to player.
your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
Mechanical Error indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

Comfort and Convenience Features 177

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:51 32SAA650_181

Audio System (A Type)

Operating the CD Changer To select a different disc, press the If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
(Optional) DISC (Preset 6) or DISC playing, the system will automatically
A Compact Disc changer is available (Preset 5) button. The next disc in switch to the CD changer and begin
for your vehicle. It holds up to 6 the changer is loaded and played play where it left off. If there are no
discs, providing several hours of when you press the DISC button. CDs in the changer, the display will
continuous entertainment. You DISC loads and plays the previous flash. You will have to select another
operate this CD changer with the disc. If you select an empty slot in mode (AM or FM) with the FM/AM
same controls used for the in-dash the magazine, the changer will, after button.
CD player. finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This When you switch back to CD mode,
Load the desired CDs in the continues until it finds a CD to load the system selects the same unit (in-
magazine and load the magazine in and play. dash or changer) that was playing
the changer according to the when you switched out of CD mode.
instructions that came with the unit. If you load a CD in the in-dash player
Play only standard round discs. Odd- while the changer is playing a CD, To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or the system will stop the changer and RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
cause other problems. begin playing the in-dash CD. To dash player operating instructions.
select the changer again, press the
Press the AUX button. You will see AUX button. Play will begin where it Protecting Compact Discs
CD in the display. The system will left off. Use the AUX button to For information on how to handle
start to play the first track of the first switch between the player and the and protect compact discs, see page
disc. When that disc ends, the next changer. 225 .
disc in the magazine is loaded and
played. After the last disc finishes,
the system returns to disc 1.

178 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:33:59 32SAA650_182

Audio System (A Type)

CD Changer Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the magazine eject button and pull out
to the right. If you cannot clear the the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
error indication, take the vehicle to FOCUS Error the magazine again. If the code does not
your dealer. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CD.
magazine
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
CD changer

Comfort and Convenience Features 179

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:07 32SAA650_183

Audio System (B Type)

Your audio system provides clear A.SEL ST INDICATOR A.SEL INDICATOR


reception on each band while the BUTTON
preset buttons allow you to easily
select your favourite stations.
SCAN SCAN
Operating the Radio BUTTON INDICATOR
The ignition switch must be in the SEEK BAR
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the audio system.
Turn the system on by pushing the
/VOL knob, the FM/AM /VOL TUNE KNOB
button or CD/AUX button. Adjust KNOB
the volume by turning the knob.

PRESET BUTTONS

The band and frequency that the You can use any of five methods to
radio was last tuned to is displayed. find radio stations on the selected
To change bands, press the FM/AM band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
button. On the UKW (FM) band, ST SELECT, and the preset buttons.
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. ST will flash
if you are driving in an area where
the radio signal is weak. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.

180 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:16 32SAA650_184

Audio System (B Type)

TUNE Use the TUNE knob to SCAN The SCAN function 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
tune the radio to a desired frequency. samples all the stations with strong function to tune the radio to a
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to signals on the selected band. To desired station.
tune to a higher frequency, or to the activate it, press the SCAN button,
left to tune to a lower frequency. then release it. The system will scan 3. Pick the preset button you want
Turn the knob right or left until the up the band for a station with a for that station. Press the button
display reaches the desired strong signal. When it finds one, it and hold it until you hear a beep.
frequency. will stop and play that station for
approximately 5 seconds. If you do 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
SEEK The SEEK function nothing, the system will then scan total of six stations on AM and
searches the band for a station with for the next strong station and play twelve stations on FM.
a strong signal. To activate it, press that for 5 seconds. When it plays a
the SEEK bar or , then station that you want to continue Once a stations frequency is stored,
release it. Depending on which part listening to, press the SCAN button simply press and release the proper
of the SEEK bar you press, the again. preset button to tune to it.
system scans upward or downward
from the current frequency. It stops Preset You can store the The preset frequencies will be lost if
when it finds a station with a strong frequencies of your favourite radio your vehicles battery goes dead, is
signal. stations in the six preset buttons. disconnected, or the audio fuse is
Each button will store one frequency removed.
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

1. Select the desired band. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 181

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:22 32SAA650_185

Audio System (B Type)

AUTO SELECT If you are


travelling far from home and can no A.SEL BUTTON A.SEL INDICATOR
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
FM/AM BUTTON
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans FM band,
looking for stations with strong PRESET BUTTONS
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six FM stations in the preset buttons. With Auto Select on, you can Auto Select does not erase the
You can then use the preset buttons manually store any frequencies in frequencies that you preset
to select those stations. the preset buttons. previously. When you return home,
turn off Auto Select by pressing the
If you are in a remote area, Auto A. SEL button. The preset buttons
Select may not find six strong FM will then select the frequencies you
stations. If this happens, you will see originally set.
a 0 displayed when you press any
preset button that does not have a
station stored.

182 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:29 32SAA650_186

Audio System (B Type)

Radio Data System (RDS)


With your audio system, you can TP INDICATOR
utilize many convenient features TA INDICATOR
provided by the Radio Data System
(RDS). PTY/NEWS BUTTON

With the FM band selected, you can


keep listening to the same station
even if its frequency changes as you TA BUTTON
enter different regions while you are
travelling. FM/AM
BUTTON
The RDS function turns on auto-
matically when you turn the system
on. If the station you are listening to /VOL
is an RDS station, the frequency KNOB
display will disappear and the station
name will be displayed. Then, the
system will automatically keep
selecting the frequency with the PRESET BUTTONS
strongest signal from the frequen-
cies that carry the same programs.
This can save you the trouble of
re-tuning to obtain the same station
as long as you are in the same RDS
network area. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 183

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:38 32SAA650_187

Audio System (B Type)

You can turn the RDS function on or Program Service Name Display TA (Traffic Announcement Standby)
off. To switch the function on or off, If the station you are listening to is Function
press the /VOL knob for more an RDS station, the frequency When the TA button is pressed and
than 2 seconds with the audio display will disappear and the station released, TA will light on the
system on, then press the Preset 2 name or PTY information will be display and the system will stand by
repeatedly. To set the RDS on or off, displayed. Press and release the for traffic announcements.
press the /VOL knob again. PTY/NEWS button to switch the
display information between the When a traffic information (TP)
When the signals of the RDS station name of network/station and the station is selected, TP will light on
become so weak that the system can PTY information (see page 186 for the display indicating that traffic
no longer follow the station, the the PTY display information). reports can be received from this
system will hold the last tuned station. When the EON (Enhanced
frequency and the display will Other Network) TP station is
change from the station name to the selected, TP will also light on the
frequency. display.

In some countries, you cannot utilize EON information cross-references


features provided by RDS as the other program services that
RDS function is not provided in all broadcast traffic information, and
stations. when EON information is received,
traffic reports can be received
through another program service.

184 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:44 32SAA650_188

Audio System (B Type)

You can receive traffic information


while you are listening to a CD. If the TA INDICATOR
system is tuned to a TP or EON TP
NEWS INDICATOR
station before playing a CD, the TP INDICATOR
system will stand by for traffic PTY/NEWS BUTTON
announcements by pressing the TA
button (TA indicator ON) and the
system will switch from CD to the
traffic announcement when it begins. TA BUTTON
The system will return to the CD
mode when the traffic information is FM/AM
finished. BUTTON

To turn off the TA function, press


the TA button again. TA will go out
from the display.

If you use SEEK or Auto Select with


the TA function ON, the system SEEK BAR
searches only TP or EON TP
stations.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 185

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:49 32SAA650_189

Audio System (B Type)

PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs SCIENCE : Programs about nature,
When the PTY/NEWS button is expanding upon the news. science, and technology.
pressed for more than 2 seconds, the CLASSICS : Serious classics; SPORT : Programs concerned with
PTY display function comes on. This performances of major orchestral any aspect of sports.
function lets you know the type of works. VARIED : Light entertainment
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned programs.
broadcasting. For example, if the with any aspect of national or
station is broadcasting dramas, regional culture.
DRAMA is shown in the display. If DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
it is a station of scientific programs, EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
SCIENCE will be shown. The EDUCATE : Educational programs.
principal PTYs are shown in the INFO : General information and
following. advice.
L.CLASS : Light classics; classical
music for non-specialist appreciation.
NEWS : Short accounts of facts,
events, publicly expressed views,
reportage, etc.
OTH MUS : Other types of music,
such as Jazz, R & B, Folk, Country,
Reggae.
POP MUS : Commercial music of
popular appeal.
ROCK MUS : Contemporary modern
music.

186 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:34:56 32SAA650_190

Audio System (B Type)

After you select the desired program While a PTY is displayed, you can After your desired PTY is displayed,
type, the system will search for a use the SEEK bar to find a station of press either side of the SEEK bar
station with the same PTY code as the desired PTY. When you press again within 5 seconds. The system
the selected program type. When either side of the SEEK bar, the will go into the PTY search mode
you use this function for the first display will show different PTYs (see and it will search for a station of the
time, NEWS will appear as it was the PTYs list on the previous page). selected PTY. If there is no station
preset at the factory. available in the selected PTY, NO
The PTY setting mode is cancelled if PTY is displayed for about 5
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds and the PTY search mode is
transmit PTY data, NO PTY is seconds after selecting the desired cancelled.
displayed. When the selected station PTY by operating the SEEK bar.
is not an RDS station, NO RDS is Some stations may broadcast the
displayed for about 5 seconds. The programs with contents different
PTY display function turns off and from their PTY code.
the display returns to normal if no
further steps are taken. In the PTY search mode, the tuning
step is set to 50 kHz while searching
the FM band. This step changes to
100 kHz when the AF or TA function
is activated.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 187

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:02 32SAA650_191

Audio System (B Type)

PTY/News Interrupt Function Your audio system has other PTY Alarm
To activate this function, press the interrupt functions (including TA PTY code ALARM is used for
PTY/NEWS button for more than 2 function). The interrupt function emergency announcements, such as
seconds and select NEWS. The first activated has priority over the natural disasters. When this code is
system will hold the last tuned FM others and the indication of the other received, ALARM comes on the
station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
listening to the CD. With this activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
function on, playing the CD is turn off the currently activated system will return to the normal
interrupted and the system switches interrupt function. operation mode.
from CD mode to the FM newscast
when the newscast is broadcasting
from the FM station.

When the program is changed to


another program or the frequency
cannot be received for 10 seconds
due to weak signal, the system will
return to the CD mode automatically.

188 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:10 32SAA650_192

Audio System (B Type)

Adjusting the Sound


Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are H BUTTON R BUTTON
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the MODE knob. The mode changes
from BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL, TA BUTTON
and then back to BAS each time you
press the button. Each mode is
shown in the display as it changes.

Balance/Fader These two


modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength. M BUTTON MODE KNOB

Select BAL or FAD by pressing the Treble/Bass Use these modes to As you adjust a mode, you will hear a
MODE knob. Adjust the Balance or adjust the tone to your liking. Select beep whenever the adjustment level
Fader to your liking by turning the TRE or BAS by pressing the MODE reaches the centre, maximum, or
knob. The adjustment level is shown knob. Adjust the desired mode by minimum of its range. The system
on the display. turning the knob. The adjustment will automatically return the display
level is shown on the display. to normal mode about 5 seconds
after you stop adjusting a mode with
the MODE knob.

Comfort and Convenience Features 189

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:17 32SAA650_193

Audio System (B Type)

Digital Clock To set the hours, press the H For example:


The display of your audio system (Preset 1) button. Press and hold the 1:06 would RESET to 1:00
usually shows the time when the H button until the hour advances to 1:52 would RESET to 2:00
ignition switch is in the the desired time.
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) If your vehicles battery is
position. To set the minutes, press the M disconnected or goes dead, the time
(Preset 2) button. Press and hold the setting will be lost. To set the time
To set the time, press the TA button M button until the minutes numbers again, follow the setting procedure.
for more than 2 seconds until you advance to the desired time.
hear a beep. The time display will
begin blinking. You can use the R (Preset 3) button
to quickly set the time to the nearest
hour. Press the R (Preset 3) button.
If the displayed time is before the
half hour, pressing R (Preset 3) sets
the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, pressing R (Preset 3) sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.

190 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:27 32SAA650_194

Audio System (B Type)

Operating the CD Player


You operate the CD player with the RDM BUTTON
same controls used for the radio. RPT INDICATOR

With the ignition switch in the


ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
RPT RDM
position, insert the disc into the CD BUTTON INDICATOR
slot. Push the disc in halfway, the EJECT FM/AM
drive will pull it in the rest of the way BUTTON BUTTON
and begin to play. The number of the
track that is playing is shown in the
display.

You can also play 8-cm (3-in) discs


without using an adapter ring. You /VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR CD/AUX BUTTON
should not try to use an adapter ring.
This may cause the audio system to
damage or malfunction. In all cases, play only standard round When the system reaches the end of
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the disc, it will return to the begin-
For best results when using CD-R/ the drive or cause other problems. ning and play the disc again.
CD-RW discs, use only high quality
discs labelled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R/CD-RW, the
recording must be closed in order Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
for the disc to be used by CD players. The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 191

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:35 32SAA650_195

Audio System (B Type)

You can switch to the radio while a You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar Each time you press and release the
CD is playing by pressing the FM/ while a disc is playing to select side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
AM button. Press the CD/AUX passages and change tracks. the system skips forward to the
button to return to playing the CD. beginning of the next track. Press
The CD will begin playing where it To move rapidly within a track, press and release the side to skip
left off. and hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press backward to the beginning of the
and hold the side to move current track. Press it again to skip
If you turn the system off while a CD forward. You will see CUE in the to the beginning of the previous
is playing, either with the /VOL display. Press and hold the side track.
knob or by turning off the ignition to move backward. You will see
switch, the disc will stay in the drive. REW displayed. Release the bar With a disc playing, you can use the
When you turn the system back on, when the system reaches the point REPEAT and RANDOM functions.
the CD will begin playing where it you want.
left off.

Press the EJECT button to remove


the disc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do not


remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD/AUX
button.

192 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:40 32SAA650_196

Audio System (B Type)

REPEAT To activate the Repeat RANDOM PLAY This feature, Protecting Compact Discs
feature, press and release the RPT when activated, plays the tracks on For information on how to handle
button. You will see RPT in the the CD in random order, rather than and protect compact discs, see page
display as a reminder. The system in the order they are recorded on the 225 .
continuously replays the current CD. To activate Random Play, press
track. Press the RPT button again to and release the RDM button. You
turn it off. will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing RDM again.

Comfort and Convenience Features 193

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:47 32SAA650_197

Audio System (B Type)

CD Player Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the vehicle to player.
your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
Mechanical Error indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

194 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:35:56 32SAA650_198

Audio System (B Type)

Operating the CD Changer To select a different disc, press the If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
(Optional) DISC (Preset 6) or DISC playing, the system will automatically
A Compact Disc changer is available (Preset 5) button. The next disc in switch to the CD changer and begin
for your vehicle. It holds up to 6 the changer is loaded and played play where it left off. If there are no
discs, providing several hours of when you press the DISC button. CDs in the changer, the display will
continuous entertainment. You DISC loads and plays the previous flash. You will have to select another
operate this CD changer with the disc. If you select an empty slot in mode (AM or FM) with the FM/AM
same controls used for the in-dash the magazine, the changer will, after button.
CD player. finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This When you switch back to CD mode,
Load the desired CDs in the continues until it finds a CD to load the system selects the same unit (in-
magazine and load the magazine in and play. dash or changer) that was playing
the changer according to the when you switched out of CD mode.
instructions that came with the unit. If you load a CD in the in-dash player
Play only standard round discs. Odd- while the changer is playing a CD, To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or the system will stop the changer and RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
cause other problems. begin playing the in-dash CD. To dash player operating instructions.
select the changer again, press the
Press the CD/AUX button. You will CD/AUX button. Play will begin Protecting Compact Discs
see CD in the display. The system where it left off. Use the CD/AUX For information on how to handle
will start to play the first track of the button to switch between the player and protect compact discs, see page
first disc. When that disc ends, the and the changer. 225 .
next disc in the magazine is loaded
and played. After the last disc
finishes, the system returns to disc 1.

Comfort and Convenience Features 195

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:04 32SAA650_199

Audio System (B Type)

CD Changer Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the magazine eject button and pull out
to the right. If you cannot clear the the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
error indication, take the vehicle to FOCUS Error the magazine again. If the code does not
your dealer. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
CD changer

196 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:13 32SAA650_200

Audio System (C Type)

Your vehicles audio system provides SCAN INDICATOR


clear reception on each band while FM/AM BUTTON SCAN BUTTON
the preset buttons allow you to easily
select your favourite stations.

Operating the Radio A.SEL BUTTON


The ignition switch must be in the A.SEL INDICATOR
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) CD/AUX ST INDICATOR
position to operate the audio system. BUTTON
Turn the system on by pushing the PRESET
/VOL knob, the FM/AM INDICATORS
button or CD/AUX button. Adjust PRESET
BUTTONS
the volume by turning the knob.

/VOL KNOB SEEK BAR TUNE BAR

The band and frequency that the You can use any of five methods to
radio was last tuned to is displayed. find radio stations on the selected
To change bands, press the FM/AM band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
button. On the UKW (FM) band, ST SELECT, and the preset buttons.
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. ST will flash
if you are driving in an area where
the radio signal is weak. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 197

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:22 32SAA650_201

Audio System (C Type)

TUNE Use the TUNE bar to tune SCAN The SCAN function To store a frequency:
the radio to a desired frequency. samples all the stations with strong
Push the TUNE bar to tune to a signals on the selected band. To 1. Select the desired band.
higher frequency, or to tune to a activate it, press the SCAN button,
lower frequency. Push the bar or then release it. The system will scan 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
until the display reaches the up the band for a station with a function to tune the radio to a
desired frequency. strong signal. When it finds one, it desired station.
will stop and play that station for
SEEK The SEEK function approximately 10 seconds. If you do 3. Pick the preset button you want
searches the band for a station with nothing, the system will then scan for that station. Press the button
a strong signal. To activate it, push for the next strong station and play and hold it until you hear a beep.
the SEEK bar or , then release that for 10 seconds. When it plays a
it. Depending on which part of the station that you want to continue 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store the
SEEK bar you press, the system listening to, press the SCAN button desired station in all six preset
scans upward or downward from the again. buttons.
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal. Preset You can store the Once a stations frequency is stored,
frequencies of your favourite radio simply press and release the proper
stations in the six preset buttons. preset button to tune to it.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two The preset frequencies will be lost if
frequencies on the FM band. your vehicles battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the audio fuse is
removed.

198 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:29 32SAA650_202

Audio System (C Type)

AUTO SELECT If you are


travelling far from home and can no FM/AM BUTTON A.SEL BUTTON
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
A.SEL
area. INDICATOR

To activate AUTO SELECT, press


the A. SEL button. A. SEL will
flash in the display, and the system
will go into scan mode for several
seconds. It automatically scans both
bands, looking for stations with PRESET BUTTONS
strong signals. It stores the
frequencies of six AM stations and With Auto Select on, you can Auto Select does not erase the
twelve FM stations in the preset manually store any frequencies in frequencies that you preset
buttons. You can then use the preset the preset buttons. previously. When you return home,
buttons to select those stations. turn off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
If you are in a remote area, Auto will then select the frequencies you
Select may not find six strong FM originally set.
stations. If this happens, you will see
a 0 displayed when you press any
preset button that does not have a
station stored.

Comfort and Convenience Features 199

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:36 32SAA650_203

Audio System (C Type)

Radio Data System (RDS) TP INDICATOR


With your audio system, you can TA BUTTON
utilize many convenient features TA INDICATOR
provided by the Radio Data System
(RDS).

With the FM band selected, you can


keep listening to the same station
even if its frequency changes as you
enter different regions while you are
travelling.

The RDS function turns on auto- PRESET


matically when you turn the system /VOL BUTTONS
on. If the station you are listening to KNOB
is an RDS station, the frequency
display will disappear and the station
name will be displayed. Then, the
system will automatically keep
selecting the frequency with the
strongest signal from the frequen-
cies that carry the same programs. PTY/NEWS BUTTON
This can save you the trouble of
re-tuning to obtain the same station
as long as you are in the same RDS
network area.

200 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:48 32SAA650_204

Audio System (C Type)

You can turn the RDS functions on AF (Alternative Frequency) TA (Traffic Announcement Standby)
or off. To switch the function on or It automatically selects a similar Function
off, press the /VOL knob for program as the one in play from When the TA button is pressed and
more than 2 seconds with the audio another station in the adjacent area. released, TA will light on the
system on, then press the Preset 1 display and the system will stand by
(AF), or the Preset 2 (REG), or the REG (Regional Program) for traffic announcements.
Preset 3 (PS). To set the RDS With this function selected, the radio
functions on or off, press the / knows that certain broadcasters do When a traffic information (TP)
VOL knob again. not air the same programs at the station is selected, TP will light on
same time. In REG mode, the radio the display indicating that traffic
When the signals of the RDS station remains turned into the regional reports can be received from this
become so weak that the system can program and will not change to station. When the EON (Enhanced
no longer follow the station, the another frequency to compensate for Other Network) TP station is
system will hold the last tuned weak reception. selected, TP will also light on the
frequency and the display will display.
change from the station name to the PS (Program Service)
frequency. If the station you are listening to is EON information cross-references
an RDS station, the frequency other program services that
In some countries, you cannot utilize display will disappear and the station broadcast traffic information, and
features provided by RDS as the name or PTY information will be when EON information is received,
RDS function is not provided in all displayed. Press and release the traffic reports can be received
stations. PTY/NEWS button to switch the through another program service.
display information between the
name of network/station and the
PTY information (see page 203 for
the PTY display information). CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:54 32SAA650_205

Audio System (C Type)

You can receive traffic information


while you are listening to a CD. If the
system is tuned to a TP or EON TP
TP INDICATOR
station before playing a CD, the
system will stand by for traffic TA BUTTON TA INDICATOR
announcements by pressing the TA
button (TA indicator ON) and the
system will switch from CD to the
traffic announcement when it begins.
The system will return to the CD
mode when the traffic information is FM/AM NEWS
finished. BUTTON INDICATOR

To turn off the TA function, press


the TA button again. TA will go out
from the display.

If you use SEEK or Auto Select with


the TA function ON, the system
searches only TP or EON TP
stations. PTY/NEWS BUTTON SEEK BAR

202 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:36:59 32SAA650_206

Audio System (C Type)

PTY Display Function AFFAIRS : Topical programs SCIENCE : Programs about nature,
When the PTY/NEWS button is expanding upon the news. science, and technology.
pressed for more than 2 seconds, the CLASSICS : Serious classics; SPORT : Programs concerned with
PTY display function comes on. This performances of major orchestral any aspect of sports.
function lets you know the type of works. VARIED : Light entertainment
programs the selected RDS station is CULTURE : Programs concerned programs.
broadcasting. For example, if the with any aspect of national or
station is broadcasting dramas, regional culture.
DRAMA is shown in the display. If DRAMA : All radio plays and serials.
it is a station of scientific programs, EASY MUS : M.O.R MUSIC.
SCIENCE will be shown. The EDUCATE : Educational programs.
principal PTYs are shown in the INFO : General information and
following. advice.
L.CLASS : Light classics; classical
music for non-specialist appreciation.
NEWS : Short accounts of facts,
events, publicly expressed views,
reportage, etc.
OTH MUS : Other types of music,
such as Jazz, R & B, Folk, Country,
Reggae.
POP MUS : Commercial music of
popular appeal.
ROCK MUS : Contemporary modern
music.
CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 203

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:06 32SAA650_207

Audio System (C Type)

After you select the desired program While a PTY is displayed, you can After your desired PTY is displayed,
type, the system will search for a use the SEEK bar to find a station of press either side of the SEEK bar
station with the same PTY code as the desired PTY. When you press again within 5 seconds. The system
the selected program type. When either side of the SEEK bar, the will go into the PTY search mode
you use this function for the first display will show different PTYs (see and it will search for a station of the
time, NEWS will appear as it was the PTYs list on the previous page). selected PTY. If there is no station
preset at the factory. available in the selected PTY, NO
The PTY setting mode is cancelled if PTY is displayed for about 5
If the selected RDS station does not no further steps are taken within 5 seconds and the PTY search mode is
transmit PTY data, NO PTY is seconds after selecting the desired cancelled.
displayed. When the selected station PTY by operating the SEEK bar.
is not an RDS station, NO RDS is Some stations may broadcast the
displayed for about 5 seconds. The programs with contents different
PTY display function turns off and from their PTY code.
the display returns to normal if no
further steps are taken. In the PTY search mode, the tuning
step is set to 50 kHz while searching
the FM band. This step changes to
100 kHz when the AF or TA function
is activated.

204 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:12 32SAA650_208

Audio System (C Type)

PTY/News Interrupt Function Your audio system has other PTY Alarm
To activate this function, press the interrupt functions (including TA PTY code ALARM is used for
PTY/NEWS button for more than 2 function). The interrupt function emergency announcements, such as
seconds and select NEWS. The first activated has priority over the natural disasters. When this code is
system will hold the last tuned FM others and the indication of the other received, ALARM comes on the
station/network PTY while you are interrupt function goes out. To display and the volume is changed.
listening to the CD. With this activate the other interrupt function, When the alarm is cancelled, the
function on, playing the CD is turn off the currently activated system will return to the normal
interrupted and the system switches interrupt function. operation mode.
from CD mode to the FM newscast
when the newscast is broadcasting
from the FM station.

When the program is changed to


another program or the frequency
cannot be received for 10 seconds
due to weak signal, the system will
return to the CD mode automatically.

Comfort and Convenience Features 205

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:25 32SAA650_209

Audio System (C Type)

Adjusting the Sound H BUTTON


Bass, Treble, Fader, and Balance are M BUTTON
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the / button. The mode
changes from BAS to TRE to FAD to
BAL, and then back to BAS each
time you press the button. Each
mode is shown in the display as it
changes.
R BUTTON
/
Balance/Fader These two BUTTON
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back /VOL KNOB
strength.
Treble/Bass Use these modes to As you adjust a mode, you will hear a
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the adjust the tone to your liking. Select beep whenever the adjustment level
/ button. Adjust the TRE or BAS by pressing the / reaches the centre, maximum, or
Balance or Fader to your liking by button. Adjust the desired minimum of its range. The system
turning the /VOL knob. The mode by turning the /VOL will automatically return the display
adjustment level is shown on the knob. The adjustment level is shown to normal mode about 5 seconds
display. on the display. after you stop adjusting a mode with
the /VOL knob.

206 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:33 32SAA650_210

Audio System (C Type)

Digital Clock To set the hours, press and hold the For example:
The display of your audio system H (Preset 4) button until the hour 1:06 would RESET to 1:00
usually shows the time when the advances to the desired time. 1:52 would RESET to 2:00
ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) To set the minutes, press and hold If your vehicles battery is
position. the M (Preset 5) button until the disconnected or goes dead, the time
numbers advance to the desired time. setting will be lost. To set the time
To set the time, press the / again, follow the setting procedure.
button for more than 2 seconds You can use the R (Preset 6) button
until you hear a beep. The time to quickly set the time to the nearest
display will begin blinking. hour. Press the R (Preset 6) button.
If the displayed time is before the
half hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets
the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.

Comfort and Convenience Features 207

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:43 32SAA650_211

Audio System (C Type)

Operating the CD Player SCAN/RPT BUTTON


You operate the CD player with the FM/AM BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR RDM BUTTON
same controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch in the


ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) EJECT
BUTTON
position, insert the disc into the CD
RDM
slot. Push the disc in halfway, the CD/AUX INDICATOR
drive will pull it in the rest of the way BUTTON
RPT
and begin to play. The number of the INDICATOR
track that is playing is shown in the
display. TUNE BAR

You can also play 8-cm (3-in) discs


without using an adapter ring. You /VOL KNOB SEEK/SKIP BAR
should not try to use an adapter ring.
This may cause the audio system to
damage or malfunction. In all cases, play only standard round When the system reaches the end of
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the disc, it will return to the begin-
For best results when using CD-R/ the drive or cause other problems. ning and play the disc again.
CD-RW discs, use only high quality
discs labelled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R/CD-RW, the
recording must be closed in order Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
for the disc to be used by CD players. The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.

208 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:51 32SAA650_212

Audio System (C Type)

You can switch to the radio while a You can use the TUNE bar or the Each time you push and release the
CD is playing by pressing the FM/ SEEK/SKIP bar while a disc is SEEK/SKIP bar , the system skips
AM button. Press the CD/AUX playing to select passages or to forward to the beginning of the next
button to return to playing the CD. change tracks. track. Push and release to skip
The CD will begin playing where it backward to the beginning of the
left off. To move rapidly within a track, push current track. Push it again to skip to
and hold the TUNE bar or the the beginning of the previous track.
If you turn the system off while a CD SEEK/SKIP bar. Push and hold to
is playing, either with the /VOL move forward. Press and hold to With a disc playing, you can use the
knob or by turning off the ignition move backward. Release the bar REPEAT, RANDOM and SCAN
switch, the disc will stay in the drive. when the system reaches the point functions.
When you turn the system back on, you want.
the CD will begin playing where it
left off.

Press the EJECT button to remove


the disc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do not


remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 10 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD/AUX
button.
CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 209

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:37:57 32SAA650_213

Audio System (C Type)

REPEAT To activate the Repeat SCAN This feature, when Protecting Compact Discs
feature, press the SCAN/RPT button activated, samples all the tracks on For information on how to handle
for more than 2 seconds. You will the CD in the order they are and protect compact discs, see page
see RPT in the display. The system recorded on the CD. To activate the 225 .
continuously replays the current Scan feature, select the Scan mode
track. Press the SCAN/RPT button by pressing the SCAN/RPT button.
for more than 2 seconds again to You will see SCAN in the display.
turn it off. The system will then play the first
track approximately 10 seconds. If
RANDOM PLAY This feature, you do nothing, the system will then
when activated, plays the tracks on play the following tracks for 10
the CD in random order, rather than seconds each. When it plays a track
in the order they are recorded on the that you want to continue listening to,
CD. To activate Random Play, press press the SCAN/RPT button again.
and release the RDM button. You After all tracks on that disc are
will see RDM in the display. The sampled, the SCAN mode is
system will then select and play cancelled. Pressing the SCAN/RPT
tracks randomly. This continues button again will also deactivate this
until you deactivate Random Play by feature.
pressing RDM again.

210 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:04 32SAA650_214

Audio System (C Type)

CD Player Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the vehicle to player.
your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
Mechanical Error indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

Comfort and Convenience Features 211

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:13 32SAA650_215

Audio System (C Type)

Operating the CD Changer To select a different disc, press the If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
(Optional) DISC (Preset 6) or DISC playing, the system will automatically
A Compact Disc changer is available (Preset 5) button. The next disc in switch to the CD changer and begin
for your vehicle. It holds up to 6 the changer is loaded and played play where it left off. If there are no
discs, providing several hours of when you press the DISC button. CDs in the changer, the display will
continuous entertainment. You DISC loads and plays the previous flash. You will have to select another
operate this CD changer with the disc. If you select an empty slot in mode (AM or FM) with the FM/AM
same controls used for the in-dash the magazine, the changer will, after button.
CD player. finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This When you switch back to CD mode,
Load the desired CDs in the continues until it finds a CD to load the system selects the same unit (in-
magazine and load the magazine in and play. dash or changer) that was playing
the changer according to the when you switched out of CD mode.
instructions that came with the unit. If you load a CD in the in-dash player
Play only standard round discs. Odd- while the changer is playing a CD, To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or the system will stop the changer and RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
cause other problems. begin playing the in-dash CD. To dash player operating instructions.
select the changer again, press the
Press the CD/AUX button. You will CD/AUX button. Play will begin Protecting Compact Discs
see CD in the display. The system where it left off. Use the CD/AUX For information on how to handle
will start to play the first track of the button to switch between the player and protect compact discs, see page
first disc. When that disc ends, the and the changer. 225 .
next disc in the magazine is loaded
and played. After the last disc
finishes, the system returns to disc 1.

212 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:20 32SAA650_216

Audio System (C Type)

CD Changer Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart Press the magazine eject button and pull out
to the right. If you cannot clear the the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
error indication, take the vehicle to FOCUS Error the magazine again. If the code does not
your dealer. disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
No CD magazine in the Insert CD magazine.
CD changer

Comfort and Convenience Features 213

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:27 32SAA650_217

Audio System (D Type)

Your audio system provides clear


reception on each band while the SCAN BUTTON ST INDICATOR
preset buttons allow you to easily A.SEL BUTTON SCAN INDICATOR
select your favourite stations.
FM BUTTON A.SEL INDICATOR
Operating the Radio
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the audio system.
Turn the system on by pushing the
VOL/PWR knob, the AM or FM
button or CD button. Adjust the
volume by turning the knob.
VOL/PWR TUNE/SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON PRESET BUTTONS BUTTONS
AM BUTTON

The band and frequency that the You can use any of five methods to
radio was last tuned to is displayed. find radio stations on the selected
To change bands, press the AM or band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
FM button. On the FM band, ST will SELECT, and the preset buttons.
be displayed if the station is broad-
casting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.

214 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:39 32SAA650_218

Audio System (D Type)

TUNE Use the TUNE/SEEK/ SCAN The SCAN function To store a frequency:
SKIP buttons to tune the radio to a samples all the stations with strong
desired frequency. Press the signals on the selected band. To 1. Select the desired band.
button to tune to a higher activate it, press the SCAN button,
frequency, or the button to tune then release it. You will see SCAN in 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
to a lower frequency. the display. The system will scan up function to tune the radio to a
the band for a station with a strong desired station.
SEEK The SEEK function signal. When it finds one, it will stop
searches the band for a station with and play that station for 3. Pick the preset button you want
a strong signal. To activate it, press approximately 5 seconds. If you do for that station. Press the button
the TUNE/SEEK/SKIP buttons on nothing, the system will then scan and hold it until you hear a beep.
either the or side until you for the next strong station and play
hear a beep, then release it. that for 5 seconds. When it plays a 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store the
Depending on which side you press, station that you want to continue desired station in all six preset
the system scans upward or down- listening to, press the SCAN button buttons.
ward from the current frequency. It again.
stops when it finds a station with a Once a stations frequency is stored,
strong signal. Preset You can store the simply press and release the proper
frequencies of your favourite radio preset button to tune to it.
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency The preset frequencies will be lost if
on the AM band, and two your vehicles battery goes dead, is
frequencies on the FM band. disconnected, or the audio fuse is
removed.

CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 215

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:46 32SAA650_219

Audio System (D Type)

AUTO SELECT If you are


travelling far from home and can no A.SEL BUTTON A.SEL INDICATOR
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select FM BUTTON
feature to find stations in the local
area.

To activate AUTO SELECT, press


the A. SEL button. A. SEL will
flash in the display, and the system
will go into scan mode for several
seconds. It automatically scans both
bands, looking for stations with
strong signals. It stores the
frequencies of six AM stations and PRESET BUTTONS
twelve FM stations in the preset AM BUTTON
buttons. You can then use the preset
buttons to select those stations. With Auto Select on, you can Auto Select does not erase the
manually store any frequencies in frequencies that you preset
If you are in a remote area, Auto the preset buttons. previously. When you return home,
Select may not find six strong AM turn off Auto Select by pressing the
stations or twelve strong FM stations. A. SEL button. The preset buttons
If this happens, you will see a 0 will then select the frequencies you
displayed when you press any preset originally set.
button that does not have a station
stored.

216 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:38:54 32SAA650_220

Audio System (D Type)

Adjusting the Sound


Bass, Treble, Fader, and Balance are
each adjustable. You select which of VOL/PWR KNOB
these you want to adjust by pressing
the SOUND button. The mode
changes from BAS to TRE to FAD to
BAL, and then back to BAS each
time you press the button. Each
mode is shown in the display as it
changes.

Balance/Fader These two


modes adjust the strength of the H BUTTON
sound coming from each speaker. R BUTTON
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back SOUND BUTTON M BUTTON CLOCK BUTTON
strength.
Treble/Bass Use these modes to The system will automatically return
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the adjust the tone to your liking. Select the display to the selected audio
SOUND button. Adjust the Balance TRE or BAS by pressing the SOUND mode about 5 seconds after you stop
or Fader to your liking by turning button. Adjust the desired mode by adjusting a mode with the VOL/
the VOL/PWR knob. The turning the VOL/PWR knob. The PWR knob.
adjustment level is shown on the adjustment level is shown on the
display. display.

Comfort and Convenience Features 217

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:01 32SAA650_221

Audio System (D Type)

Digital Clock You can use the R (Preset 6) button If your vehicles battery is
The display of your audio system to quickly set the time to the nearest disconnected or goes dead, the time
usually shows the time when the hour. Press the R (Preset 6) button. setting will be lost. To set the time
ignition switch is in the If the displayed time is before the again, follow the setting procedure.
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) half hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets
position. the clock back to the previous hour.
If the displayed time is after the half
To set the time, press the CLOCK hour, pressing R (Preset 6) sets the
button for more than 2 seconds until clock forward to the beginning of the
you hear a beep. The time display next hour.
will begin blinking.
For example:
To set the hours, press and hold the 1:06 will reset to 1:00
H (Preset 4) button until the hour 1:52 will reset to 2:00
advances to the desired time.

To set the minutes, press and hold


the M (Preset 5) button until the
numbers advance to the desired time.

218 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:10 32SAA650_222

Audio System (D Type)

Operating the CD Player


You operate the CD player with the SCAN BUTTON
same controls used for the radio. EJECT BUTTON
FM BUTTON
With the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position, insert the disc into the CD
slot. Push the disc in halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the way
and begin to play. The number of the
track that is playing is shown in the
display.

For best results when using CD-R/ VOL/PWR RDM CD BUTTON TUNE/SEEK/SKIP
KNOB BUTTON BUTTONS
CD-RW discs, use only high quality
discs labelled for audio use. When AM BUTTON RPT BUTTON
recording a CD-R/CD-RW, the
recording must be closed in order In all cases, play only standard round When the system reaches the end of
for the disc to be used by CD players. discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the disc, it will return to the begin-
the drive or cause other problems. ning and play the disc again.

You cannot load and play 8-cm (3-in)


Do not use discs with adhesive labels. discs in this system.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 219

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:19 32SAA650_223

Audio System (D Type)

You can switch to the radio while a You can use the TUNE/SEEK/SKIP With a disc playing, you can use the
CD is playing by pressing the AM or buttons while a disc is playing to REPEAT, RANDOM and SCAN
FM button. Press the CD button to select passages and change tracks. functions.
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off. To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the TUNE/SEEK/SKIP
If you turn the system off while a CD buttons. Press the side to move
is playing, either with the VOL/PWR forward. Press the side to move
knob or by turning off the ignition backward. Release the button when
switch, the disc will stay in the drive. the system reaches the point you
When you turn the system back on, want.
the CD will begin playing where it
left off. Each time you press and release the
side of the TUNE/SEEK/SKIP
Press the EJECT button to remove buttons, the system skips forward to
the disc from the drive. the beginning of the next track.
Press and release the side to
If you eject the disc, but do not skip backward to the beginning of
remove it from the slot, the system the current track. Press it again to
will automatically reload the disc skip to the beginning of the previous
after 15 seconds and put the CD track.
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.

220 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:24 32SAA650_224

Audio System (D Type)

REPEAT To activate the Repeat SCAN This feature, when Protecting Compact Discs
feature, press the RPT (preset 4) activated, samples all the tracks on For information on how to handle
button. You will see RPT in the the CD in the order they are and protect compact discs, see page
display. The system continuously recorded on the CD. To activate the 225 .
replays the current track. Press the Scan feature, select the Scan mode
RPT button again to turn it off. by pressing the SCAN button. You
will see SCAN in the display. The
RANDOM PLAY This feature, system will then play the first track
when activated, plays the tracks on approximately 10 seconds. If you do
the CD in random order, rather than nothing, the system will then play
in the order they are recorded on the the following tracks for 10 seconds
CD. To activate Random Play, press each. When it plays a track that you
the RDM (preset 3) button. You will want to continue listening to, press
see RDM in the display. The system the SCAN button again. After all
will then select and play tracks tracks on that disc are sampled, the
randomly. This continues until you SCAN mode is cancelled. Pressing
deactivate Random Play by pressing the SCAN button again will also
RDM again. deactivate this feature.

Comfort and Convenience Features 221

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:31 32SAA650_225

Audio System (D Type)

CD Player Error Indications


If you see an error indication in the Indication Cause Solution
display while operating the CD
player, find the cause in the chart to Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
the right. If you cannot clear the FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
error indication, take the vehicle to player.
your dealer. Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
Mechanical Error indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your dealer.
High temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

222 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:41 32SAA650_226

Audio System

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception


(Mexico model) (Mexico model)
Your vehicles radio can receive the How well your vehicles radio
complete AM and FM bands. receives stations is dependent on
Those bands cover these frequen- many factors, such as the distance
cies: from the stations transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
AM band: pheric conditions.
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: A radio stations signal gets weaker
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
Radio stations on the AM band are AM station, you will notice the sound
assigned frequencies at least ten volume becoming weaker, and the Driving very near the transmitter of
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). station drifting in and out. If you are a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations on the FM band are listening to an FM station, you will frequency close to the frequency of
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 see the stereo indicator flickering off the station you are listening to can
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). and on as the signal weakens. also affect your radios reception.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will You may temporarily hear both
Stations must use these exact go off and the sound will fade stations, or hear only the station you
frequencies. It is fairly common for completely as you get out of range of are close to.
stations to round-off the frequency in the stations signal.
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as FM101. CONTINUED

Comfort and Convenience Features 223

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/13 18:21:57 32SAA650_227

Audio System

As required by the FCC:


Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the users
authority to operate the equipment.

Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by


band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the stations transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

224 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:39:55 32SAA650_228

Audio System

Protecting Compact Discs

Handle a CD by its edges; never When a CD is not being played, store A new CD may be rough on the
touch either surface. Do not place it in its case to protect it from dust inner and outer edges. The small
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. and other contamination. To prevent plastic pieces causing this roughness
These, along with contamination warpage, keep CDs out of direct can flake off and fall on the re-
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip sunlight and extreme heat. cording surface of the disc, causing
pens, can cause the CD to not play skipping or other problems. Remove
properly, or possibly jam in the drive. To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. these pieces by rubbing the inner
Wipe across the disc from the centre and outer edges with the side of a
to the outside edge. pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in


the CD player or the magazine.

Comfort and Convenience Features 225

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:02 32SAA650_229

Audio System

Remote Audio Controls The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
(For some types) up () or down (). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
or bottom of the button and hold it track each time you press the top
MODE BUTTON until the desired volume is reached, () of the CH button. Press the
then release it. bottom () to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it again to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM or number in the display.
CD (if a CD is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, use


the CH button to change stations.
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON Each time you press the top () of
the button, the system goes to the
Three controls for the audio system next preset station on the band you
are mounted in the steering wheel are listening to. Press the bottom
hub. These let you control basic () to go back to the previous
functions without removing your preset station.
hand from the wheel.

226 Comfort and Convenience Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:07 32SAA650_230

Audio System

Auxiliary Input Jack


(For some types)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

Auxiliary Input Jack is on the centre


console panel. The system will
accept auxiliary input from standard
audio accessories.

When the appropriate audio unit is


connected with the auxiliary input
jack, press the AUX button to select
the unit.

Comfort and Convenience Features 227

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:10 32SAA650_231

228

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:14 32SAA650_232

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 230


vehicle, you should know what petrol Petrol ............................................... 230
to use, and how to check the levels Service Station Procedures .......... 231
of important fluids. You also need to Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 231
know how to properly store luggage Opening the Bonnet .................. 233
or packages. The information in this Oil Check ................................ 234
section will help you. If you plan to Engine Coolant Check .......... 236
add any accessories to your vehicle, Fuel Cutoff System........................ 237
please read the information in this Fuel Economy ................................ 238
section first. Vehicle Condition ...................... 238
Driving Habits ............................ 238
Accessories and Modifications .... 239
Accessories................................. 239
Modifications ............................. 240
Additional Safety Precautions .. 240
Carrying Luggage .......................... 241
Load Limit .................................. 242
Carrying Items in the
Passenger Compartment ...... 242
Carrying Luggage in the
Luggage Area or on a
Roof Rack ........................... 243

Before Driving 229

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:26 32SAA650_233

Break-in Period, Petrol

Break-in Period For some types EU models:


Help assure your vehicles future We also recommend that you should Turkey models:
reliability and performance by paying not tow a trailer during the first 800 Israel models:
extra attention to how you drive km (500 miles). Your vehicle is designed to operate
during the first 1,000 km (625 miles). most effectively on Premium
During this period: Petrol unleaded petrol with a Research
Using petrol containing lead will Octane Number (RON) of 95 or
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid damage your vehicles emissions con- higher.
acceleration. trols and engine. This contributes to Petrol of the recommended
air pollution. Research Octane Number (RON)
Avoid hard braking. New brakes may not be available in some areas.
need to be broken-in by moderate In this case, petrol of a lower octane
use for the first 300 km (187.5 may be used if it does not cause
miles). engine knocking.

Do not change the oil until the Except EU models:


recommended time or distance Your vehicle is designed to operate
interval shown in the maintenance on Regular unleaded petrol with a
schedule. Research Octane Number (RON) of
91 or higher.
Do not tow a trailer. Petrol of the recommended
Research Octane Number (RON)
You should follow these same re- may not be available in some areas.
commendations with an overhauled In this case, petrol of a lower octane
or exchanged engine, or when the may be used if it does not cause
brakes are relined. engine knocking.

230 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:35 32SAA650_234

Service Station Procedures

Filling the Fuel Tank


TAB Petrol is highly flammable ATTACHMENT
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured FUEL FILL CAP
when handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keep


heat, sparks, and flame
away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
TETHER (For some types)

1. Because the fuel fill cap is on the 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
left side of the vehicle, park with You may hear a hissing sound as
that side closest to the service pressure inside the tank escapes.
station pumps.
For some types
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling The fuel fill cap is attached to the
on the tab of the drivers door. fuel filler with a tether to avoid
losing the cap. Put the attachment on
the fuel fill cap into the slit on the
fuel fill door.

CONTINUED

Before Driving 231

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:41 32SAA650_235

Service Station Procedures

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel 5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on, Refer to page 346 for high pressure
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do tighten it until it clicks at least washing of the vehicle.
not try to top off the tank, leave once.
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes. 6. Push the fuel fill door closed.

232 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:48 32SAA650_236

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Bonnet If you can open the bonnet without


lifting the bonnet latch handle, or the
BONNET RELEASE HANDLE LATCH bonnet latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page 302 ).

1. Shift to Park or neutral and set the 2. Standing in front of the vehicle,
parking brake. Pull the bonnet put your fingers between the front
release handle located under the edge of the bonnet and the front
lower corner of the dashboard. grille. The bonnet latch handle is
The bonnet will pop up slightly. above the H logo. Push this
handle up until it releases the
bonnet. Lift the bonnet.

CONTINUED

Before Driving 233

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:40:56 32SAA650_237

Service Station Procedures

To close the bonnet, lift it up slightly Oil Check


to remove the support rod from the All engines consume oil as part of
hole. Put the support rod back into their normal operation, therefore,
its holding clip. Lower the bonnet to the engine oil level must be checked
about 30 cm (a foot) above the regularly, for example when
fender, then let it drop. refuelling. Always check the oil
before a long journey.
After closing the bonnet, make sure
it is securely latched. The amount of oil consumed
depends on how the vehicle is driven
and the climatic and road conditions
encountered. The rate of oil
CLIP SUPPORT ROD consumption can be up to 1 litre per
1,000 km/625 miles. Consumption is
3. Pull the support rod out of its clip likely to be higher when the engine
by holding the grip and insert the is new.
end into the hole on the centre left
or right side of the bonnet. Make sure the engine is warmed up
and parked on level ground. Turn off
the engine and wait approximately 3
minutes before checking the oil level.

234 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:03 32SAA650_238

Service Station Procedures

DIPSTICK

1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean 3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
cloth or paper towel.

CONTINUED

Before Driving 235

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:11 32SAA650_239

Service Station Procedures

Engine Coolant Check Refer to Owners Maintenance


Checks on page 283 for information
RESERVE TANK on checking other items in your
vehicle.

UPPER MARK
MAX
LOWER MARK
MIN

4. Remove the dipstick again and Look at the coolant level in the
check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 290 for
If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
see Adding Oil on page 286 . coolant.

236 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:17 32SAA650_240

Fuel Cutoff System (For some types)

There is a fuel cutoff switch behind After the switch has activated, it
the dashboard on the passengers FUEL CUTOFF SWITCH must be reset by pressing the button
door side. before the engine can be restarted.

To locate the switch, remove the


dashboard cover first, then take off
the side kick panel. Extend your arm Leaking petrol can ignite or
through the removed side kick panel. explode, causing you to be
seriously or fatally injured.

Always check for fuel leaks


COVER before resetting the switch.

In a collision or sudden impact, this


switch automatically cuts off the fuel
supply to the engine.

Before Driving 237

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:26 32SAA650_241

Fuel Economy

The condition of your vehicle and Driving Habits A cold engine uses more fuel than a
your driving habits are the two most You can improve fuel economy by warm engine. It is not necessary to
important things that affect the fuel driving moderately. Rapid acceler- warm-up a cold engine by letting it
consumption. ation, abrupt cornering, and hard idle for a long time. You can drive
braking use more fuel. away in about a minute, no matter
Vehicle Condition how cold it is outside. The engine
Always maintain your vehicle accord- Always drive in the highest gear that will warm up faster, and you get
ing to the maintenance schedule. allows the engine to run and acceler- better fuel economy. To cut down on
This will keep it in top operating ate smoothly. the number of cold starts, try to
condition. combine several short trips into one.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
An important part of that mainte- to maintain a constant speed. Every The air conditioning (on some types)
nance is the Owners Maintenance time you slow down and speed up, puts an extra load on the engine
Checks (see page 283 ). For your vehicle uses extra fuel. which makes it use more fuel. Turn
example, an underinflated tyre off the A/C to cut down on air condi-
causes more rolling resistance, tioning use. Use the flow-through
which uses fuel. It also wears out ventilation when the outside air
faster, so check the tyre pressure at temperature is moderate.
least monthly.

In winter, the build-up of snow on


your vehicles underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel
consumption and reduces the chance
of corrosion.

238 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:36 32SAA650_242

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing capacity, they can interfere with the
some non-Honda accessories, can operation of your vehicle, or even
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or cause the airbags to deploy.
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicles handling, stability, Before installing any accessory:
following information. and performance, and cause
a crash in which you can be Make sure the accessory does not
Accessories hurt or killed. obscure any lights, or interfere
Your dealer has genuine Honda with proper vehicle operation or
accessories that allow you to Follow all instructions in this performance.
personalize your vehicle. These owners manual regarding
accessories have been designed and accessories and Be sure electronic accessories do
approved for your vehicle. modifications. not overload electrical circuits
(see pages 377 and 379 ).
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications. When properly installed, cellular Have the installer contact your
Although aftermarket accessories phones, alarms, two-way radios, and dealer for assistance before
may fit on your vehicle, they may not low-powered audio systems should installing any electronic accessory.
meet factory specifications, and not interfere with your vehicles
could adversely affect your vehicles computer-controlled systems, such If possible, have your dealer inspect
handling and stability (see as the SRS and anti-lock brake the final installation.
Modifications on page 240 for system.
additional information).
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicles electrical system

Before Driving 239

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:45 32SAA650_243

Accessories and Modifications

Modifications In addition, any modifications that On vehicles with side airbags


Do not remove any original decrease ground clearance increase Do not attach hard objects on or
equipment or modify your vehicle in the chance of undercarriage parts near a front door. If a side airbag
any way that would alter its design or striking a curb, speed bump, or other inflates, a cup holder or other hard
operation. This could make your raised object, which could cause object attached on or near the
vehicle unsafe and illegal to drive. your airbags to deploy. door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
For example, do not make any Do not modify your steering wheel
modifications that would change the or any other part of your Do not place any objects over the
ride height of your vehicle, or install Supplemental Restraint System. outside edge of a front seat-back.
wheels and tyres with a different Modifications could make the Covering the outside edge of a
overall diameter. system ineffective. front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
Such modifications can adversely Additional Safety Precautions prevent the airbag from inflating
affect handling, and interfere with Do not attach or place objects on the properly.
the operation of the vehicles anti- airbag covers. Any object attached to
lock brakes and other systems. or placed on the covers marked SRS
AIRBAG, in the centre of the
steering wheel and on top of the
dashboard, could interfere with the
proper operation of the airbags. Or,
if the airbags inflate, the objects
could be propelled inside the vehicle
and hurt someone.

240 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:41:51 32SAA650_244

Carrying Luggage

Your vehicle has several convenient


storage areas so you can stow
LUGGAGE AREA luggage safely.

The glove box, and the pockets (on


some types) in the seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The luggage area is intended for
larger, heavier items. In addition, the
back seat can be folded down to
allow you to carry more luggage or
longer items.

However, carrying too much luggage,


or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicles handling, stability, and
operation, and make it unsafe.
Before carrying any type of luggage,
be sure to read the following pages.

SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX


: For some types

Before Driving 241

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:00 32SAA650_245

Carrying Luggage

Load Limit Carrying Items in the Passenger


When you load luggage, the total Compartment
weight of the vehicle, all passengers, Overloading or improper Store or secure all items that could
luggage and hitch must not exceed loading can affect handling be thrown around and hurt
the maximum permissible weight. and stability and cause a someone during a crash.
The load for the front and rear axles crash in which you can be
also must not exceed the maximum hurt or killed. Do not put any items on top of the
permissible axle weight. tonneau cover (for some types).
Refer to page 389 for the maximum Follow all load limits and They can block your rear view,
permissible weight and maximum other loading guidelines in and could be thrown about the
permissible axle weight. this manual. interior in a crash.

(For some countries) Be sure items placed on the floor


When you load luggage, the behind the front seats cannot roll
combined weight of the vehicle, all under the seats and interfere with
passengers and their luggage, and the drivers ability to operate the
trailer nose load must not exceed the pedals, or with the proper
Gross Vehicle Mass. The load for operation of the seats.
the front and rear axles also must Do not stack items higher than the
not exceed the Gross Axle Mass. back of the front seats.
The specifications are shown on the
engine number plate attached to the Keep the glove box closed while
radiator support bulkhead (see page driving. If it is open, a passenger
386 ). could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.

242 Before Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:08 32SAA650_246

Carrying Luggage

Carrying Luggage in the Luggage If you carry large items that


Area or on a Roof Rack prevent you from closing the
Distribute luggage evenly on the tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the A normal bike rack must not be
floor of the luggage area, placing passenger area. To avoid the fitted to the tailgate.
the heaviest items on the bottom possibility of carbon monoxide
and as far forward as possible. poisoning, follow the instructions
Try to secure the items with rope on page 79 .
or cord so they will not shift while
you are driving. If you carry any items on a roof
rack, be sure the total weight of
If you fold down the back seat, tie the rack and the items does not
down items that could be thrown exceed the maximum allowable
about the vehicle during a crash or weight. Please contact your dealer
sudden stop. for further information.
Try to secure the items with rope
or cord so they will not shift while Concerning lashing means and
you are driving. Do not stack retaining devices offered on the
items higher than the back of the accessory market, please contact
front seats. your dealer.

Refer to page 127 for folding the


rear seats.

Before Driving 243

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:10 32SAA650_247

244

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:14 32SAA650_248

Driving

This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 246 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 247 System......................................... 264
conditions, and how to operate the Starting in Cold Weather Driving in Bad Weather ................ 267
manual and automatic transmissions at High Altitude ..................... 248 Towing a Trailer ............................ 269
(CVT). It also includes important Manual Transmission.................... 248
information on parking your vehicle, Recommended Shift Points ...... 249
the braking system, and facts you Maximum Allowable Speeds .... 250
need if you are planning to tow a Automatic Transmission (CVT) .. 251
trailer. Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............. 251
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 251
Shift Lever Positions ................. 252
Honda CVT 7 Speed Mode.. 255
7-Speed Auto Shift Mode ...... 255
7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode ................................... 256
Shift Lock Release ..................... 258
Parking ............................................ 259
Parking Tips ........................... 259
The Braking System...................... 260
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 260
Brake System Design................ 261
Anti-lock Brakes ........................ 261
Important Safety
Reminders .......................... 262
ABS Indicator ......................... 262

Driving 245

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:26 32SAA650_249

Preparing to Drive

You should do the following checks 5. Check the adjustment of the seat 10. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
and adjustments every day before (see page 124 ). (II) position. Check the indicators
you drive your vehicle. in the instrument panel.
6. Check the adjustment of the
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see 11. Start the engine (see page 247 ).
and outside lights are clean and pages 137 and 138 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, 12. Check the gauges and indicators
or ice. 7. Check the adjustment of the in the instrument panel (see page
steering wheel (see page 109 ). 86 ).
2. Check that the bonnet and tailgate
are fully closed. 8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed.
3. Visually check the tyres. If a tyre
looks low, use a gauge to check its 9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
pressure. your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 18 ).
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.

246 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:35 32SAA650_250

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 5. If the engine does not start within
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. If the engine right away, repeat step 4 with the
electrical accessories to reduce does not start right away, do not accelerator pedal pressed half-way
the drain on the battery. hold the key in the START (III) down. If the engine starts, release
position for more than 15 seconds pressure on the accelerator pedal
3. Manual transmission: at a time. Pause for at least 10 so the engine does not race.
Push the clutch pedal down all the seconds before trying again.
way and shift the transmission to 6. If the engine still does not start,
neutral. press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
Automatic transmission (CVT): The Immobilizer System (on some starting in order to clear flooding.
Make sure the shift lever is in types) protects your vehicle from As before, keep the ignition key in
Park. Press on the brake pedal. theft. If an improperly-coded key (or the START (III) position for no
other device) is used, the engines more than 15 seconds. Return to
fuel system is disabled. See step 5 if the engine does not start.
Immobilizer System on page 112 . If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.

Driving 247

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:43 32SAA650_251

Starting the Engine, Manual Transmission

Starting in Cold Weather at High 1. Turn off all electrical accessories Manual Transmission
Altitude (Above 2,400 metres/ to reduce the drain on the battery.
8,000 feet)
An engine is harder to start in cold 2. Push the accelerator pedal half-
weather. The thinner air found at way to the floor and hold it there
high altitude above 2,400 meters while starting the engine. Do not
(8,000 feet) adds to the problem. hold the ignition key in the
Use the following procedure: START (III) position for more
than 15 seconds. When the engine
starts, release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine
speeds up and smooths out.

3. If the engine fails to start in step 2, The manual transmission is syn-


push the accelerator pedal to the chronized in all forward gears for
floor and hold it there while you smooth operation. It has a lockout so
try to start the engine for no more you cannot shift directly from fifth to
than 15 seconds. If the engine reverse. When shifting up or down,
does not start, return to step 2. make sure you push the clutch pedal
down all the way, shift to the next
If the outside temperature is below gear, and let the pedal up gradually.
freezing, or if your vehicle has not When you are not shifting, do not
been driven for several days, warm rest your foot on the clutch pedal.
up the engine for a few minutes This can cause excessive clutch wear.
before driving (prohibited in
Germany! 30 StVO).

248 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:50 32SAA650_252

Manual Transmission

Come to a full stop before you shift Recommended Shift Points


into reverse. You can damage the Drive in the highest gear that lets
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding- the engine run and accelerate
reverse with the vehicle moving. up can cause loss of control smoothly. This will give you the best
Push down the clutch pedal, and on slippery surfaces. If you fuel economy and effective emis-
pause for a few seconds before crash, you can be injured. sions control. The following shift
shifting into reverse, or shift into one points are recommended:
of the forward gears for a moment. Use extra care when driving
This stops the gears so they wont on slippery surfaces.
grind. Shift up Normal acceleration

When slowing down, you can get 1st to 2nd 24 km/h (15 mph)
extra braking from the engine by 2nd to 3rd 40 km/h (25 mph)
shifting to a lower gear. This extra 3rd to 4th 64 km/h (40 mph)
braking can help you maintain a safe 4th to 5th 75 km/h (47 mph)
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometers red zone in
the lower gear. Refer to the
Maximum Allowable Speeds Chart.

Driving 249

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:42:56 32SAA650_253

Manual Transmission

Maximum Allowable Speeds 1 : 1.2 SOHC model (Except KY models)


The speeds in this table are the Gear Maximum allowable 2 : 1.3 /1.4 SOHC model
maximum allowable speeds in each speeds (Except KY, KZ, KN, KM, KX and
gear. If you exceed these speeds, the KP models)
engine speed will enter into the 1st 47 km/h (29 mph)1 3 : 1.5 SOHC VTEC model
tachometers red zone. If this occurs, 49 km/h (31 mph)2 4 : 1.2 SOHC model (KY model)
you may feel the engine cut in and 51 km/h (32 mph)3 5 : 1.3 /1.4 SOHC model (KY, KZ, KN, KM,
out. This is caused by a limiter in the 46 km/h (29 mph)4, 5 KX and KP models)
engines computer controls. The 2nd 85 km/h (53 mph)1
engine will run normally when you 88 km/h (55 mph)2 KY model : Bahrain, Egypt, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,
reduce the RPM below the red zone. 93 km/h (58 mph)3 Saudi Arabia, U.A.E
82 km/h (51 mph)4, 5 KZ model : Brunei, Singapore
Before downshifting, make sure the 3rd 127 km/h (79 mph)1 KN model : South Africa
vehicle will not exceed the maximum 125 km/h (77 mph)2 KM model : Brazil
allowable speed in the chart in the 131 km/h (82 mph)3 KX model : Mexico
lower gear to avoid engine damage. 124 km/h (77 mph)4, 5 KP model : Argentina, Chile
4th 173 km/h (107 mph)1
160 km/h (99 mph)2
168 km/h (105 mph)3
158 km/h (99 mph)4, 5

250 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:03 32SAA650_254

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Continuously Variable Shift Lever Position Indicator The D indicator comes on for a
Transmission (CVT) few seconds when you turn the
(For some types) ignition switch to the ON (II)
Hondas Continuously Variable position. If it flashes while driving (in
Transmissions unique design any shift position), it indicates a
provides a smooth, constant flow of possible problem in the transmission.
power. It is electronically controlled Avoid rapid acceleration, and have
for more precise operation and the transmission checked by your
better fuel economy. dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator on the instrument


panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.

Driving 251

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:11 32SAA650_255

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Shift Lever Positions To shift from: Do this: Park (P) This position mechani-
P to R Press the brake pedal and cally locks the transmission. Use
SHIFT LEVER press the release button. Park whenever you are turning off or
R to P starting the engine. To shift out of
N to R Press the release button. Park, you must press on the brake
S to L pedal, have your foot off the accelera-
L to S tor pedal, and press the release
S to D button on the front of the shift lever.
D to N Move the shift lever.
D to S If you have done all of the above and
N to D still cannot move the lever out of
R to N Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
RELEASE BUTTON 258 .
You cannot shift out of Park with the
The shift lever has six positions. It brake pedal depressed when the
must be in Park or neutral to start ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
the engine. When you are stopped in the ACCESSORY (I) position.
D, S, L, N or R, press firmly on the
brake pedal and keep your foot off
the accelerator pedal. When you
start along a slope to go uphill, be
sure to apply the parking brake in
addition to using the foot brake
because creeping may be less
effective.

252 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:17 32SAA650_256

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Reverse (R) To shift from re- Neutral (N) Use neutral if you
verse to Park, see the explanation need to restart a stalled engine, or if
under Park. To shift to reverse from it is necessary to stop briefly with
neutral, come to a complete stop first. the engine idling. Always shift to
Press the release button before Park position if you need to leave the
shifting into reverse from neutral. vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another position.

Drive (D) Use this position for


your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically adjusts to keep
the engine at the best speed for
You must also press the release driving conditions. To help the
button to shift into Park. To avoid engine warm up faster, the transmis-
transmission damage, come to a sion will select ratios that allow the
complete stop before shifting into engine to run at higher speeds when
Park. The shift lever must be in Park it is cold.
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.

CONTINUED

Driving 253

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:21 32SAA650_257

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Sport (S) Selecting Sport shifts Low (L) To shift to Low, press For faster acceleration when in D or
the transmission into a lower range the release button on the front of the S, the transmission will automatically
of ratios for better acceleration and shift lever. Use Low to get more kick down to a lower range of
increased engine braking. Use Sport power when climbing, and for ratios by pushing the accelerator
when you are going down a steep hill. maximum engine braking when pedal to the floor.
going down steep hills.

254 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:29 32SAA650_258

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Honda CVT 7 Speed Mode 7-Speed Auto Shift Mode


(For some types)
This CVT is provided with a
seven-stage speed mode in the D
and S position.
The 7 Speed Mode has two options;
the 7-speed auto shift mode and
7-speed manual shift mode.
By using the 7 Speed Mode Main
Switch, the transmission can be
shifted up and down automatically
through seven-stages. In the auto
shift mode, the steering shift switch 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH SHIFT INDICATOR
is ready to be activated. When this
switch is activated, the auto shift As you press the 7 Speed Mode Main Under certain conditions, the auto
mode will be cancelled and 7-speed Switch, you activate the 7-speed auto shift mode may shift to the over-
manual shift mode comes into shift mode. Shifting of seven-stage drive in the D position. At this time,
operation. In this mode, the driver speed will take place depending on the shift indicator displays 7.
can shift up and down manually in the throttle opening and the vehicle
seven-stage speed with the use of speed. The current stage is shown in
steering shift switches; much like a the shift indicator located in the
manual transmission. instrument panel.

CONTINUED

Driving 255

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:38 32SAA650_259

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

To release the 7-speed auto shift 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode


mode and return to the ordinary
STEERING SHIFT SWITCHES M INDICATOR
automatic transmission (CVT),
(, SWITCH)
either press the 7 Speed Mode Main
Switch or move the shift lever to
another position. When moving the
shift lever, be careful not to operate
incorrectly (see page 252 ). () ()

When the engine is stopped in the


7-speed auto shift mode, restarting
returns the system to the ordinary
automatic transmission (CVT). 7 SPEED MODE MAIN SWITCH SHIFT INDICATOR

The following are the procedures to 2. Press the 7 Speed Mode Main
change to the 7-speed manual shift Switch.
mode. The currently-selected speed will
be shown in the shift indicator of
1. Move the shift lever to the D or the instrument panel.
S position.
3. Press the steering shift switch (
Select the shift position that or switch).
matches the way of driving (see The M indicator in the
pages 253 and 254 ). instrument panel will come on and
the selected speed will be shown
on the shift indicator.

256 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:49 32SAA650_260

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Execute this operation after If you stop without pressing the shift The 7-speed manual shift mode will
confirming that the M indicator is switch, the speed will be not function under the following
illuminated. automatically shifted down to the conditions.
2nd speed. If you want to start from
The 7-speed manual shift mode the 1st speed, press the switch. When shifting up with the vehicle
allows shifting of the 1st to 7th stopped, you cannot go any further
position. To release the 7-speed manual shift than the 3rd speed.
To shift, press the steering shift mode and return to the ordinary
switch ( or switch). automatic transmission (CVT), When shifting down during
To shift up, press the switch. either press the 7 Speed Mode Main running, no shift-down will take
To shift down, press the switch. Switch or move the shift lever to place when the shifting down
another position. When moving the causes over-revving of the engine.
No more than two speeds can be shift lever, be careful not to operate
changed at a time. incorrectly (see page 252 ). No shift-up will take place when
less than the set-up engine
Under certain conditions, the manual When the engine is stopped in the revolutions.
shift mode may shift to the over- 7-speed manual shift mode,
drive in the D position. At this time, restarting returns the system to the No shifting will take place when
the shift indicator displays 7. ordinary automatic transmission pressing and switches
(CVT). simultaneously.
If you keep depressing the
accelerator pedal without pressing No shifting will take place when
the shift switch, the speed will be pressing one of the two shift
automatically shifted up just before switches with another shift switch
the tachometers red zone. being pressed.

Driving 257

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:43:57 32SAA650_261

Automatic Transmission (CVT)

Shift Lock Release 5. Remove the key from the Shift


This allows you to move the shift Lock Release slot. Depress the
lever out of Park if the normal brake pedal and restart the engine.
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release If you need to use the Shift Lock
button does not work. Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
1. Turn off the engine and set the vehicle checked by your dealer.
parking brake.

2. Remove the key from the ignition SHIFT LOCK


switch. RELEASE BUTTON RELEASE SLOT

3. Insert the key in the Shift Lock


Release slot next to the shift lever.

4. Push down on the key while you


press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.

258 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:05 32SAA650_262

Parking

Always use the parking brake when If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn Parking Tips
you park your vehicle. The indicator the front wheels away from the curb. Make sure the sunroof (on some
on the instrument panel shows that If you have a manual transmission, types) and the windows are closed.
the parking brake is not fully re- put it in first gear.
leased; it does not indicate that the Turn off the lights.
parking brake is firmly set. Make If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
sure the parking brake is set firmly the front wheels toward the curb. If Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
or your vehicle may roll if it is you have a manual transmission, put in the luggage area, or take them
parked on an incline. it in reverse gear. with you.

If your vehicle has an automatic Make sure the parking brake is fully Lock the doors and tailgate with
transmission (CVT), set the parking released before driving away. the key or the remote transmitter
brake before you put the Driving with the parking brake (on some types).
transmission in Park. This keeps the partially set can overheat or damage
vehicle from moving and putting the rear brakes. Never park over dry leaves, tall
pressure on the parking mechanism grass, or other flammable materi-
in the transmission making it als. The three way catalytic con-
easier to move the shift lever out of verter gets very hot, and could
Park when you want to drive away. cause these materials to catch on
fire.

Driving 259

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:13 32SAA650_263

The Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with front Constant application of the brakes Brake Wear Indicators
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear when going down a long hill builds The front disc brakes on all models
wheels may be disc or drum, up heat and reduces their effective- have audible brake wear indicators.
depending on the model. A power ness. Use the engine to assist the On some types, they are also on the
assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes by downshifting to a lower rear brakes.
on the brake pedal. The ABS (on gear and taking your foot off the
some types) helps you retain accelerator pedal. When the brake pads need replacing,
steering control when braking very you will hear a distinctive metallic
hard. Check your brakes after driving screeching sound when you apply
through deep water. Apply the the brakes. If you do not have the
Put your foot on the brake pedal only brakes moderately to see if they feel brake pads replaced, they will begin
when you intend to brake. Resting normal. If not, apply them gently and screeching all the time.
your foot on the pedal keeps the frequently until they do. Since a
brakes applied lightly, causing them longer distance is needed to stop Your brakes may sometimes squeal
to build up heat. Heat build-up can with wet brakes, be extra cautious or squeak when you apply them
reduce how well your brakes work. It and alert in your driving. lightly. Do not confuse this with the
also keeps your brake lights on all brake wear indicators. They make a
the time, confusing drivers behind very audible screeching.
you.

260 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:23 32SAA650_264

The Braking System

Brake System Design Anti-lock Brakes You should never pump the
The hydraulic system that operates (For some types) brake pedal; this defeats the
the brakes has two separate circuits. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) helps purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
Each circuit works diagonally across to prevent the wheels from locking work for you by always keeping firm,
the vehicle (the left-front brake is up and skidding during hard braking, steady pressure on the brake pedal
connected with the right-rear brake, allowing you to retain steering con- as you steer away from the hazard.
etc.). If one circuit should develop a trol. This is sometimes referred to as
problem, you will still have braking stomp and steer.
at two wheels. When the front tyres skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle You will feel a pulsation in the brake
continues straight ahead even pedal when the ABS activates, and
though you turn the steering wheel. you may hear some noise. This is
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up normal; it is the ABS rapidly
and helps you retain steering control pumping the brakes.
Front by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it. Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tyres have. On dry pave-
The ABS also balances the front-to- ment, you will need to press on the
rear braking distribution according brake pedal very hard before you ac-
to vehicle loading. tivate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

CONTINUED

Driving 261

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:30 32SAA650_265

The Braking System

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a ABS Indicator
ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
ABS INDICATOR
distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
vehicle; it only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
control during braking. You should lock. Slow down and allow a greater
always maintain a safe following dis- distance between vehicles under
tance from other vehicles. those conditions.

ABS will not prevent a skid that


results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and The ABS is self-checking. If anything
weather conditions. goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
ABS cannot prevent a loss of sta- page 93 ). This means the anti-lock
bility. Always steer moderately function of the braking system has
when you are braking hard. Severe shut down. The brakes still work like
or sharp steering wheel movement a conventional system without anti-
can still cause your vehicle to veer in- lock, providing normal stopping
to oncoming traffic or off the road. ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible if this indicator stays on
after you start the engine, or comes
on while driving.

262 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:36 32SAA650_266

The Braking System

If the ABS indicator and the brake For some types


system indicator come on together, The VSA indicator will come on
and the parking brake is fully along with the ABS indicator.
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.

Test your brakes as instructed on


page 371 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.

Driving 263

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:42 32SAA650_267

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System (For some types)

The Vehicle Stability Assist system The VSA system cannot enhance the VSA Activation Indicator
helps to stabilize the vehicle during vehicles driving stability in all
cornering if the vehicle turns more situations and does not control your VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
or less than desired. It also assists vehicles entire braking system. It is
you in maintaining traction while still your responsibility to drive and
accelerating on loose or slippery corner at reasonable speeds and to
road surfaces. It does this by leave a sufficient margin of safety.
regulating the engines output, and
by selectively applying braking.

When VSA activates, you may notice


that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. You will also see
the VSA activation indicator blink. When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.

264 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:50 32SAA650_268

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System (For some types)

VSA System Indicator If the VSA system indicator comes VSA Off Switch
on while driving, pull to the side of In certain unusual conditions when
VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR the road when it is safe and turn off your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
the engine. Reset the system by mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
restarting the engine, and watch the to free it with the VSA temporarily
VSA system indicator. If the switched off. When the VSA system
indicator remains on, or comes back is off, the traction control system is
on while driving, have the VSA also off. You should only attempt to
system inspected by your dealer. free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
If the indicator does not come on VSA is on.
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a Immediately after freeing your
problem with the VSA system. Have vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
The VSA system indicator (see page your dealer inspect your vehicle as again. We do not recommend driving
93 ) comes on and stays on when soon as possible. your vehicle with the VSA and
there is a problem with the VSA traction control systems switched off.
system. The VSA activation indicator Without VSA, your vehicle will have
will also come on. normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.

CONTINUED

Driving 265

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:44:58 32SAA650_269

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System (For some types)

VSA is turned on every time you VSA and Tyre Sizes


start the engine, even if you turned it Driving with varying tyre or wheel
off the last time you drove the sizes may cause the VSA to
vehicle. malfunction. When replacing tyres,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tyres (see
page 325 ).

Deactivate the VSA system if you


need to drive with the compact spare
tyre installed (see page 354 ).

If you install winter tyres, make sure


This switch is under the drivers side they are the same size as those that
vent. Press it to turn the Vehicle were originally supplied with your
Stability Assist system on and off. vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
When VSA is off, the VSA activation your vehicle was not equipped with
indicator comes on as a reminder. VSA.
Pressing the switch again turns the
system back on.

266 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:03 32SAA650_270

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving Technique Always drive Exercise extra caution when driving


slower than you would in dry in rain after a long dry spell. After
weather. It takes your vehicle longer months of dry weather, the first
to react, even in conditions that may rains bring oil to the surface of the
seem just barely damp. Apply roadway, making it slippery.
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard
application of the brakes can cause
loss of control in wet weather. Be
extra cautious for the first few
kilometers (miles) of driving while
you adjust to the change in driving
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re- conditions. This is especially true in
quire a different driving technique snow. A person can forget some
because of reduced traction and snow-driving techniques during the
visibility. Keep your vehicle well- summer months. Practice is needed
maintained and exercise greater to relearn those skills.
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather.

Driving 267

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:11 32SAA650_271

Driving in Bad Weather

Visibility Being able to see Traction Check your tyres


clearly in all directions and being frequently for wear and proper
visible to other drivers are important pressure. Both are important in
in all weather conditions. This is preventing aquaplaning (loss of
more difficult in bad weather. To be traction on a wet surface). In the
seen more clearly during daylight winter, mount snow tyres on all four
hours, turn on your headlights and wheels for the best handling.
fog lights.
Watch road conditions carefully,
Inspect your windscreen wipers and they can change from moment to
washers frequently. Keep the wind- moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
screen washer reservoir full of the pery as ice. Clear roads can have
proper fluid. Have the windscreen patches of ice. Driving conditions
wiper blades replaced if they start to can be very hazardous when the Be very cautious when passing, or
streak the windscreen or leave parts outside temperature is near freezing. being passed by other vehicles. The
unwiped. Use the demister and air The road surface can become spray from large vehicles reduces
conditioning (on some types) to keep covered with areas of water puddles your visibility, and the wind buffeting
the windows from fogging up on the mixed with areas of ice, so your can cause you to lose control.
inside (see pages 154 and 165 ). traction can change without warning.
CAUTION: Do not drive on the road
Be careful when downshifting. If where water is deep. Driving through
traction is low, you can lock up the deep water will cause damage to the
drive wheels for a moment and cause engine and electrical equipment and the
a skid. vehicle will break down.

268 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:17 32SAA650_272

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Your vehicle has been designed Load Limits


primarily to carry passengers and
their luggage. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.

The total weight of the trailer and The trailer nose load should never
towbar (with/without brakes) plus exceed 70 kg (155 lbs). This is the
its luggage must not exceed the amount of weight the trailer puts
maximum towing weight. See page on the towbar when it is fully-
389 . loaded. As a rule of thumb for a
trailer weights of less than 700 kg
(1,550 lbs), the trailer nose load
should be 10 percent of the total
trailer package.

CONTINUED

Driving 269

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:25 32SAA650_273

Towing a Trailer (European models)

For example, if the trailer and its The maximum towing weight
load weigh 225 kg (500 lbs), the must not exceed the specified limit
trailer nose load should be 22.5 kg as shown on page 389 . Exceeding load limits or
(50 lbs). Adjust trailers luggage to improperly loading your
change the trailer nose load. Start This weight will be estimated on vehicle and trailer can cause
by putting approximately normal driving below 1,000 meters a crash in which you can be
60 percent of the luggage toward elevation. seriously injured or killed.
the front and 40 percent toward
the rear. With a trailer package of If you tow a trailer in mountainous Check the loading of your
more than 700 kg (1,550 lbs), you conditions, remember to reduce vehicle and trailer carefully
may need to adjust the luggage 10% of the combined vehicle and before starting to drive.
weight toward the rear. Never trailer weights from the maximum
load the trailer so the back is towing weight for every 1,000
heavier than the front. This takes meters of elevation.
weight off your vehicles rear axle
and reduces traction. Please consider that the instal-
lation of optionals (and trailer nose
The maximum permissible weight load when towing a trailer) will
must not exceed the specified limit reduce the loading capacity.
as shown on page 389 .
Towing a load that is too heavy can
The maximum permissible weight seriously affect your vehicles
is total weight of the vehicle, handling and performance. It can
driver, passengers, luggage and also damage the engine and
towbar. drivetrain.

270 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:34 32SAA650_274

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Checking Loads Towing Equipment and Towbars


The best way to confirm that vehicle Accessories Any towbar used on your vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits Towing can require a variety of must be properly bolted to the
is to have them checked at a public equipment, depending on the size of underbody.
scale. your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing. Refer to page 388 for the towbar
Using a suitable scale or a special mounting points.
trailer nose load gauge, check the Discuss your needs with your trailer
total weight, the weight at each axle sales or rental agency, and follow the Safety Chains
and the trailer nose load the first guidelines in the rest of this section. Always use safety chains. Make sure
time you set up a towing combination Also make sure that all equipment is they are secured to both the trailer
(a fully-loaded vehicle and trailer), properly installed and that it meets and towbar, and that they cross
then recheck the loads whenever the the countrys regulations where you under the trailer nose so that they
conditions change. are driving. can catch the trailer if it becomes
unhitched. Leave enough slack to
allow the trailer to turn corners
easily, but do not let the chains drag
on the ground.

CONTINUED

Driving 271

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:40 32SAA650_275

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights Since lighting and wiring vary in


If you are thinking of getting a trailer Your vehicle has a connector to trailer type and brand, you should
that has brakes, be sure they are install an optional trailer lighting also have a qualified technician
electronically actuated. Do not connector. It is located in the install a suitable connector between
attempt to tap into your vehicles luggage area by the right tail-lights. the vehicle and the trailer.
hydraulic system. No matter how
successful it may seem, any attempt You can get an optional trailer Always consult your dealer before
to attach trailer brakes to your lighting connector for your vehicle connecting the trailer lights to your
vehicles hydraulic system will lower from your dealer. vehicles lighting system.
braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.

272 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:51 32SAA650_276

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Additional Trailer Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist The lights and brakes on your
There may be laws requiring special When preparing to tow, and before vehicle and the trailer are working
outside mirrors when you are towing driving away, be sure to check the properly.
a trailer. Check the local laws in the following:
country. Even if there are no legal Your vehicle tyres and spare are
requirements, you should install The vehicle has been properly properly inflated, and the trailer
special mirrors if you cannot clearly serviced, and the tyres, brakes, tyres and spare are inflated as
see behind you, or if the trailer suspension, and cooling system recommended by the trailer
creates a blind spot. are in good operating condition. maker.

Ask your trailer sales or rental If you tow frequently, follow the Be sure to check regulations
agency if any other items are Severe Conditions maintenance concerning the maximum speed or
recommended or required for your schedule. driving restrictions for vehicles
towing situation. towing trailers. If you are driving
The trailer has been properly across several countries, check
serviced and is in good condition. each countrys requirements
before leaving home, because
All weights and loads are within regulations may vary.
limits (see pages 269 and 270 ).
Operating speed when towing a
The towbar, safety chains, and any trailer is restricted to 100 km/h
other attachments are secure. (62 mph).

All items on and in the trailer are


properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.

Driving 273

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:45:58 32SAA650_277

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Driving Safely With a Trailer Towing Speeds and Gears For some types
The added weight, length, and Drive slower than normal in all When driving uphill and downhill,
height of a trailer will affect your driving situations, and obey posted use the 7-speed manual shift mode to
vehicles handling and performance, speed limits for vehicles with trailers. provide the proper engine power and
so driving with a trailer requires If you have an automatic engine braking on each position.
some special driving skills and transmission (CVT), use the D Select seventh, sixth, fifth, fourth,
techniques. position or 7-speed manual shift third, second or first position;
mode (for some types) when towing depending on the vehicle speeds and
For your safety and the safety of a trailer on level roads. You can road conditions.
others, take time to practice driving select S position or 7-speed manual
manoeuvres before heading for the shift mode (for some types) when
open road, and follow the guidelines towing a trailer in hilly terrain. (See
discussed below. Driving on Hills in the next page
for additional gear information.)

274 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:03 32SAA650_278

Towing a Trailer (European models)

Making Turns and Braking Driving on Hills If you must stop when facing uphill,
Make turns more slowly and wider When climbing hills, closely watch use the foot brake or parking brake.
than normal. The trailer tracks a your high temperature indicator. If Do not try to hold the vehicle in
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it the indicator remains on, turn the air place by pressing on the accelerator,
can hit or run over something the conditioning off, reduce speed and, if as this can cause the automatic
vehicle misses. Allow more time and necessary, pull to the side of the transmission (CVT) to overheat.
distance for braking. Do not brake or road to let the engine cool.
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.

CONTINUED

Driving 275

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:14 32SAA650_279

Towing a Trailer (European models)

On vehicles with manual transmission Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Parking


When driving down hills, reduce Crosswinds and air turbulence Follow all normal precautions when
your speed and shift down to 2nd caused by passing trucks can disrupt parking, including firmly setting the
gear (manual). Do not ride the your steering and cause trailer parking brake and putting the
brakes, and remember it will take swaying. When being passed by a transmission in park (automatic) or
longer to slow down and stop when large vehicle, keep a constant speed in 1st or reverse (manual). Also,
towing a trailer. and steer straight ahead. Do not try place wheel chocks at each of the
to make quick steering or braking trailers tyres.
Driving on an uphill road of more corrections.
than 12% slope is not recommended Towing a Trailer
for your vehicle. Backing Up (Except for European models)
Always drive slowly and have Your vehicle is not designed to tow a
We recommend that you tow a someone guide you when backing up. trailer.
trailer on the road recommended by Grip the bottom of the steering
the trailer association. wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
On vehicles with automatic and turn the wheel right to move the
transmission (CVT), use Low (L) or trailer to the right.
7-speed manual shift mode (for some
types) to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill.

276 Driving

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:19 32SAA650_280

Maintenance

Regularly maintaining your vehicle is Maintenance Schedule .................. 278 Battery ............................................ 309
the best way to protect your invest- Required Maintenance Record .... 282 Replacing the Battery.................... 312
ment. You will be rewarded with Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 283 Wiper Blades .................................. 314
safer, more economical, trouble-free Fluid Locations............................... 284 Air Conditioning System ............... 317
driving. This section lists items that Engine Oil ....................................... 286 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 318
need to be checked regularly and Adding Oil................................... 286 Replacement ............................... 318
explains how to check them. It also Recommended Oil ..................... 286 Drive Belts ...................................... 320
details some simple maintenance Additives ..................................... 287 Tyres ............................................... 321
tasks you can do yourself. The Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 287 Inflation ....................................... 321
maintenance schedule shows you Cooling System .............................. 290 Inspection ................................... 322
when these things need to be done. Adding Engine Coolant ............. 290 Maintenance ............................... 323
Replacing Engine Coolant ........ 292 Tyre Rotation ............................. 323
Windscreen Washers .................... 296 Replacing Tyres and Wheels ... 324
Transmission Fluid ........................ 297 Wheels and Tyres ...................... 325
Automatic Winter Tyres .............................. 326
Transmission (CVT) ............. 297 Tyre Chains ................................ 326
Manual Transmission ............... 299 Lights .............................................. 328
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 299 Headlight Aiming ...................... 330
Brake System ............................. 300 Headlights with High Voltage
Clutch System ............................ 300 Discharge Tubes ................... 330
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 301 Replacing Bulbs ......................... 330
Fuel Filter ....................................... 302 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 342
Bonnet Latch .................................. 302
Spark Plugs ..................................... 303
Replacement ....................... 303, 306
Specifications ..................... 305, 308

Maintenance 277

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:26 32SAA650_281

Maintenance Schedule

The Required Maintenance Schedule The services and time or distance We recommend the use of genuine
specifies all maintenance required to intervals shown in the maintenance Honda parts and fluids or their
keep your vehicle in peak operating schedule assume you will use your equivalent whenever you have
condition. Maintenance work should vehicle as normal transportation for maintenance done. These are the
be performed in accordance with the passengers and their possessions. same high-quality items that went
standards and specifications of You should also follow these into your vehicle when it was new, so
Honda by properly trained and recommendations: you can be sure they fit and perform
equipped technicians. Your flawlessly.
authorized dealer meets all of these Avoid exceeding your vehicles
requirements. load limit. This puts excess strain
on the engine, brakes, and many
In EU countries, follow the other parts of your vehicle.
Maintenance Schedule in the
separate service information booklet Operate your vehicle on
that came with your vehicle. reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over a


distance of several kilometers
(miles).

Always use the recommended fuel


only (see page 230 ).

278 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:44 32SAA650_282

Maintenance Schedule (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 This Maintenance Schedule
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0 outlines the minimum required
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
maintenance that you should
Replace engine oil1 Normal Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 1 year
perform to ensure the trouble-

M A I N T E N A N C E
Severe Every 5,000 km (3,125 miles) or 6 months
Replace engine oil filter 1
Normal free operation of your vehicle.
Severe Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months Due to regional and climatic
Clean air cleaner element (Dry type only) Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) differences, some additional
Replace air cleaner element Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) servicing may be required.
Inspect valve clearance Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) Please consult your warranty
Replace fuel filter2
booklet for a more detailed
Replace spark plugs Iridium type Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Normal type Every 40,000 km (25,000 miles)
description.
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years, then every
100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

1 : Refer to page 281 for replacement information under severe conditions.

S C H E D U L E
2 : Refer to page 302 for replacement information under driving conditions.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 279

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:46:57 32SAA650_283

Maintenance Schedule (Except EU)


Service at the indicated distance km x 1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
or time whichever comes first. miles x 1,000 12.5 25.0 37.5 50.0 62.5 75.0 87.5 100.0 112.5 125.0
months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120
Replace transmission fluid1 M/T Normal
S C H E D U L E

Severe
CVT Normal
Severe
Inspect front and rear brakes Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter (if equipped)
Rotate tyres (Check tyre inflation and condition at Rotate tyres every 10,000 km (6,250 miles)
least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Every 10,000 km (6,250 miles) or 6 months
M A I N T E N A N C E

Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluid
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections

1 : Refer to page 281 for replacement information under severe conditions.

280 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:03 32SAA650_284

Maintenance Schedule (Except EU)

Severe Driving Conditions


If you drive your vehicle under one or more of the following severe

M A I N T E N A N C E
conditions, the items described below must be serviced according to the
maintenance schedule indicated as Severe.

Severe Conditions:
A: Driving less than 8 km (5 miles) per trip, or in freezing temperatures,
driving less than 16 km (10 miles) per trip.
B: Driving in extremely hot [over 35C (95F)] conditions.
C: Extensive idling or long periods of stop-and-go driving.
D:Trailer towing (if applicable), driving with a loaded roof rack, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
E: Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.
F: Driving more than 20,000 km (12,500 miles) per year, or driving at high
speed frequently.

S C H E D U L E
Items Condition

Engine oil and oil filter A, B, C, D, E

Transmission fluid
M/T B, D

CVT B, C, D, F

Maintenance 281

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:10 32SAA650_285

Required Maintenance Record (Except EU)

Have your servicing dealer record all Required Maintenance below. Keep receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

20,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 120,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
12,500 Mi. 75,000 Mi.
(or 12 Mo.) (or 72 Mo.)
Date Date

40,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 140,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
25,000 Mi. 87,500 Mi.
(or 24 Mo.) (or 84 Mo.)
Date Date

60,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 160,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
37,500 Mi. 100,000 Mi.
(or 36 Mo.) (or 96 Mo.)
Date Date

80,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 180,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
50,000 Mi. 112,500 Mi.
(or 48 Mo.) (or 108 Mo.)
Date Date

100,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month 200,000 km (Sign or Stamp) Km (Mi.) or Month
62,500 Mi. 125,000 Mi.
(or 60 Mo.) (or 120 Mo.)
Date Date

282 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:22 32SAA650_286

Owners Maintenance Checks

You should check the following Automatic transmission (CVT) Air conditioning system (on some
items at the use or specified intervals. Check the fluid level monthly. See types) Check its operation
page 297 . weekly. See page 317 .
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See Brakes and clutch Check the Windscreen demister Operate
page 234 . fluid level monthly. See page 299 . the heater and air conditioning
and check the demister vents
Engine coolant level Check the Brake pedal Check the brake monthly.
radiator reserve tank every time pedal for smooth operation.
you fill the fuel tank. See page 236 . Lights Check the operation of
Parking brake Check the the headlights, position lights, tail-
Windscreen washer fluid Check parking brake lever for smooth lights, high-mount brake light,
the level in the reservoir monthly. operation. turn signals, brake lights and
If weather conditions cause you to licence plate lights monthly. See
use the washers frequently, check Tyres Check the tyre pressure page 328 .
the reservoir each time you stop monthly. Examine the tread for
for fuel. See page 296 . wear and foreign objects. See page Doors Check the tailgate and
321 . all doors including the rear doors
Windscreen wipers Check the for smooth opening/closing and
wiper condition monthly. If the Battery Check its condition and secure locking.
wipers do not wipe the windscreen the terminals for corrosion
securely, check them for wear, monthly. See page 309 . Horn Check the horn operation.
cracks, and other damage.

Maintenance 283

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:27 32SAA650_287

Fluid Locations

Left-hand drive type CLUTCH FLUID


(Manual
Transmission only)
(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL BRAKE FLUID


FILL CAP (Black cap)

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID ENGINE COOLANT


(Blue cap) RESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID


(Orange loop) DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

284 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:31 32SAA650_288

Fluid Locations

Right-hand drive type

CLUTCH FLUID
(Manual
Transmission only)
BRAKE FLUID (Gray cap)
(Black cap)

ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP

RADIATOR CAP

WASHER FLUID ENGINE COOLANT


(Blue cap) RESERVOIR

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID


(Orange loop) DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)

Maintenance 285

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:41 32SAA650_289

Engine Oil

Adding Oil Pour the oil slowly and carefully so Select the proper SAE viscosity oil
you do not spill any. Clean up any for your vehicle according to this
spills immediately. Spilled oil could chart:
damage components in the engine
compartment. Always use a fuel-efficient oil that
says API Service SL or higher grade.
Recommended Oil This oil is formulated to help your
European models engine use less fuel.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engines performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil. It is highly
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP recommended that you use genuine
Honda Motor Oil, ACEA A1/B1,
To add oil, unscrew and remove the ACEA A3/B3, or ACEA A5/B5.
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve in your vehicle for as long as you
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the own it.
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely. Except for European models
Let the engine warm up and turn off Oil is a major contributor to your
the engine, let it sit for engines performance and longevity.
approximately 3 minutes, then check Always use a premium-grade deter- Ambient Temperature
the oil level. Do not fill above the gent oil. It is highly recommended
upper mark; you could damage the that you use genuine Honda Motor 1: European models
engine. Oil in your vehicle for as long as you 2: Except for European models
own it.

286 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:48 32SAA650_290

Engine Oil

Additives Changing the Oil and Filter


Your vehicle does not need any oil Always change the oil and filter
additives. Purchasing additives for according to the time and distance Repeated, prolonged
the engine or transmission will not (kilometers/miles) recommenda- exposure to used motor oil
increase your vehicles performance tions in the maintenance schedule. may cause skin cancer.
or longevity. It only increases the The oil and filter collect contami-
cost of operating your vehicle. nants that can damage your engine if Wash your hands thoroughly
they are not removed regularly. with strong soap as soon as
possible after handling used
Changing the oil and filter requires oil.
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
technician.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 287

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:47:56 32SAA650_291

Engine Oil

1. Run the engine until it reaches


normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

The oil, engine components


and the exhaust system are
hot and can burn you.

Use caution and wear


protective clothing while WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL FILTER
working in the engine
compartment. 2. Open the bonnet and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter and let the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special
drain bolt and washer from the wrench is required to remove the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil filter.
into an appropriate container.
4. Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.

5. Install a new oil filter according to


instructions that come with it.

288 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:03 32SAA650_292

Engine Oil

6. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 8. Replace the engine oil fill cap. 10.Turn off the engine, let it sit for
then reinstall the drain bolt. Start the engine. The oil pressure approximately 3 minutes, then
Tighten it to: indicator light should go out within check the oil level. If necessary,
39 Nm (4.0 kgfm , 29 lbfft) five seconds. If it does not, turn off add oil to bring the level to the
the engine and reinspect your upper mark on the dipstick.
7. Refill the engine with the recom- work.
mended oil.
9. Run the engine until warmed up,
Engine oil change capacity then check the drain bolt and oil Improper disposal of engine oil can
(including filter): filter for leaks. be harmful to the environment. If
3.6 (3.8 US qt , 3.2 Imp qt) you change your own oil, please
dispose of the used oil properly. Put
it in a sealed container and take it to
a recycling centre. Do not discard it
in a waste bin or dump it on the
ground.

Maintenance 289

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:11 32SAA650_293

Cooling System

Adding Engine Coolant Always use genuine Honda All


Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.
This coolant is pre-mixed with 50% Removing the radiator cap
antifreeze and 50% water. It does not while the engine is hot can
require any additional mixing. The cause the coolant to spray
cooling system contains many out, seriously scalding you.
aluminium components that can
corrode if an improper antifreeze is Always let the engine and
used. Some antifreeze, even though radiator cool down before
labelled as safe for aluminium parts, removing the radiator cap.
may not provide adequate protection.
MAX
RESERVE TANK MIN If the reserve tank is completely 1. Make sure the engine and radiator
empty, you should also check the are cool.
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant level in the radiator.
tank is at or below the MIN line, add 2. Turn the radiator cap anticlock-
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. wise, without pressing down on it,
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. until it stops. This relieves any
The coolant you add should always pressure remaining in the cooling
be a mixture of 50% antifreeze and system.
50% water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water. 3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
anticlockwise.

290 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:18 32SAA650_294

Cooling System

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully


so you do not spill any. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled coolant
could damage components in the
engine compartment.

5. Put the radiator cap back on.


Tighten it fully.

MAX
RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK MIN

4. The coolant level should be up to 6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
the base of the filler neck. Add Fill it to halfway between the MAX
coolant if it is low. and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or


other additives to your vehicles
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.

Maintenance 291

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:25 32SAA650_295

Cooling System

Replacing Engine Coolant 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON


The cooling system should be (II) position. Turn the temperature
completely drained and refilled with control dial to maximum heat.
new coolant according to the time Turn the ignition off.
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use 2. Open the bonnet. Make sure the
genuine Honda All Season engine and the radiator are cool to
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. touch.
Use of any non-Honda coolant or
plain water can result in corrosion
and deposits in the cooling system.
RADIATOR CAP
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle. 3. Remove the radiator cap.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
technician.

292 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:33 32SAA650_296

Cooling System

COVER MOUNTING BOLT

DRAIN
PLUG

AIR CLEANER HOSE TAB

4. Loosen the drain plug on the 5. To remove the reserve tank to 6. Remove the reserve tank cap, and
bottom of the radiator. The drain the coolant, remove the air remove the mounting bolt with a
coolant will drain through the cleaner hose, and remove the wrench. Then remove the reserve
splash guard. cover (see page 332 ). tank from its holder by pulling it
straight up and drain the coolant
into an appropriate container.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 293

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:39 32SAA650_297

Cooling System

7. Put the reserve tank back in place. 9. When the coolant stops draining, FILLER NECK
Reinstall and tighten the mounting tighten the drain plug at the
bolt securely. bottom of the radiator.

8. Reinstall the air cleaner hose,


cover and reserve tank cap.

Fill up to here

10.Pour genuine Honda All Season


Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50% antifreeze and 50%
water. Pre-mixing is not required.

294 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:48:55 32SAA650_298

Cooling System

The cooling system capacity is: 15. Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
With 5-speed Manual Transmission: at least twice. Then stop the
3.9 (1.03 US gal , 0.86 Imp gal)1 engine.
3.3 (0.87 US gal , 0.73 Imp gal)2
(For engine type: L12A1, L12A3, 16. Make sure the engine and radiator
L13A1, L13A2, L13A4, L13A5) are cool to touch.
3.8 (1.00 US gal , 0.84 Imp gal) Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
(For engine type: L15A1, L15A6) radiator with coolant up to the
3.7 (0.98 US gal , 0.81 Imp gal) base of the filler neck.
(For engine type: GD1) MAX
RESERVE TANK MIN 17.Start the engine and hold it at
With Continuously Variable 1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
Transmission (CVT): 11. Start the engine and let it run for comes on. Turn off the engine.
3.8 (1.00 US gal , 0.84 Imp gal)1 about 30 seconds. Then turn off Check the coolant level in the
3.2 (0.85 US gal , 0.70 Imp gal)2 the engine. radiator and add coolant if needed.
(For engine type: L12A1, L12A3,
L13A1, L13A2, L13A4, L13A5) 12. Check the level in the radiator, 18. Install the radiator cap, and
3.7 (0.98 US gal , 0.81 Imp gal) add coolant if needed. tighten it fully.
(For engine type: L15A1, L15A6)
3.6 (0.95 US gal , 0.79 Imp gal) 13. Fill the reserve tank to the MAX 19. If necessary, fill the reserve tank
(For engine type: GD1) mark. Install the reserve tank cap. to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
1 : With air conditioning system 14. Install the radiator cap, and
2 : Without air conditioning tighten it to the first stop.
system

Maintenance 295

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:01 32SAA650_299

Windscreen Washers

Check the level in the windscreen LEVEL GAUGE When you refill the reservoir, clean
washer reservoir at least monthly the edges of the windscreen wiper
during normal use. In bad weather, blades with windscreen washer fluid
when you use the washers often, on a clean cloth. This will help to
check the level every time you stop condition the blade edges.
for fuel. This reservoir supplies the
windscreen and rear window
washers.
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
The windscreen washer reservoir is vinegar/water solution in the
located behind the headlight. windscreen washer reservoir.

Antifreeze can damage your vehicles


Check the reservoirs fluid level by paint, while a vinegar/water solution
removing the cap and looking at the can damage the windscreen washer
level gauge attached to the cap. pump.

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality Use only commercially-available


windscreen washer fluid. This windscreen washer fluid.
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.

296 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:11 32SAA650_300

Transmission Fluid

Automatic Transmission (CVT) DIPSTICK DIPSTICK


Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
The engine and transmission must
be at normal operating temperature
before checking the fluid level. UPPER
MARK
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. LOWER
Start the engine and hold it at MARK
1,500 rpm until the radiator fan
comes on and rotate it twice. Shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait at least 60 seconds,
and no more than 90 seconds, 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
after shutting off the engine to from the transmission, and wipe it the transmission securely as
check the fluid level. with a clean cloth. shown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick and check


the fluid level. It should be
between the HOT upper and lower
marks.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 297

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:19 32SAA650_301

Transmission Fluid

5. If the level is below the lower Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so 7. Insert the dipstick all the way back
mark, add fluid into the filler hole you do not spill any. Clean up any into the transmission securely as
to bring it to the level between the spills immediately. Spilled fluid could shown in the illustration.
upper and lower marks. damage components in the engine
compartment. The transmission should be drained
6. To check the accurate level, start and refilled with new fluid according
the engine again. Hold it at 1,500 For EU models to the time and distance recommen-
rpm until the radiator fan comes If you drive at high speed in high dations in the maintenance schedule.
on and rotate it twice. temperatures [above 35C (95F)],
the transmission fluid should be If you are not sure how to add fluid,
Always use genuine Honda CVT changed when you reach 40,000 km contact your dealer.
(Continuously Variable (25,000 miles) or 2 years, whichever
Transmission) Fluid. comes first.

298 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:29 32SAA650_302

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Manual Transmission If genuine Honda MTF is not Brake and Clutch Fluid
available, you may use an API Check the fluid level in the reser-
FILLER BOLT service SJ or higher grade motor oil voirs monthly. There are up to two
with a viscosity of SAE 10W-30 or reservoirs, depending on the model.
10W-40 as a temporary replacement. They are:
However, motor oil does not contain
the proper additives and continued Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
use can cause stiffer shifting. Clutch fluid reservoir
Replace as soon as it is convenient. (manual transmission only)

Clean up any spills immediately. The brake fluid should be replaced


Spilled fluid could damage according to the time recommenda-
Correct level components in the engine tion in the maintenance schedule.
compartment.
Check the fluid level with the Always use genuine Honda Brake
transmission at normal operating The transmission should be drained Fluid or an equivalent from a sealed
temperature and the vehicle sitting and refilled with new fluid according container that is marked DOT3 or
on level ground. Remove the to the time and distance recommen- DOT4 only. Brake fluid marked
transmission filler bolt and carefully dations in the maintenance schedule. DOT5 is not compatible with your
feel inside the bolt hole with your vehicles braking system.
finger. The fluid level should be up If you are not sure how to check and
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is add fluid, contact your dealer. If you are not sure how to add fluid,
not, add genuine Honda Manual contact your dealer.
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt and tighten it securely.

Maintenance 299

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:36 32SAA650_303

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake System Clutch System Low fluid level can indicate a leak in
(Manual transmission only) the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
MAX

MAX MIN
MIN
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side The fluid level should be between
of the reservoir. If the level is at or the MIN and MAX marks on the side
below the MIN mark, your brake of the reservoir. If it is not, add
system needs attention. Have the brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
brake system inspected for leaks or Use the same fluid specified for the
worn brake pads. brake system.

300 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:48 32SAA650_304

Air Cleaner Element

The air cleaner element should be CLIP


replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.

Cleaning
On vehicles with dry type air cleaner
element
The air cleaner element should also
be cleaned according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Clean the air cleaner element by
blowing compressed air through it in The air cleaner element is inside the 2. Remove the old air cleaner
the opposite direction to normal air air cleaner housing on the right side element.
flow. If you do not have access to of the engine compartment.
compressed air (such as a service 3. Carefully clean the inside of the
station), ask your dealer to do this To replace it: air cleaner housing with a damp
service. rag.
1. Unsnap the four clips and remove
Follow the replacement procedure the air cleaner housing cover. 4. Place the new air cleaner element
for removal and reinstallation. in the air cleaner housing.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner housing


cover and snap the four clips back
into place.

Maintenance 301

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:49:55 32SAA650_305

Fuel Filter, Bonnet Latch

Fuel Filter Bonnet Latch


The fuel filter should be replaced
according to the time and distance
recommendations in the mainte-
nance schedule. PIVOTS

It is recommended to replace the


fuel filter every 40,000 km (25,000
miles), or 2 years (except EU), if the
fuel you are using is suspected to be
contaminated with dust, etc. because
the filter may be clogged sooner.
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Have a qualified technician change
the fuel filter. Since the fuel system Clean the bonnet latch assembly
is under pressure, fuel can spray out with a mild cleaner, then lubricate it
and create a hazard if all fuel line with a multipurpose grease.
connections are not handled Lubricate all the moving parts (as
correctly. shown), including the pivot. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your dealer.

302 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:03 32SAA650_306

Spark Plugs

The spark plugs in your vehicle Replacement


should be replaced according to the (Except 1.5 SOHC VTEC engine
time and distance recommendations model)
in the maintenance schedule.
BOLTS CONNECTOR
BOLT
LOCK TAB

IGNITION COIL

1. Remove the two holding bolts by 3. Use a wrench to remove the bolt
using a wrench. Remove the cover holding the ignition coil. Remove
by pulling it straight up. the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
2. Clean off any dirt and oil that have 4. Disconnect the wire connector
collected around the ignition coils. from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
CONTINUED

Maintenance 303

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:10 32SAA650_307

Spark Plugs

5. Remove the spark plug with a 16 6. Put the new spark plug into the 7. Torque the spark plug. (If you do
mm (5/8 inch) spark plug socket. socket, then screw it into the hole. not have a torque wrench, tighten
Screw it in by hand so you do not the spark plug 2/3 of a turn after it
crossthread it. contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgfm , 13 lbfft)

304 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:19 32SAA650_308

Spark Plugs

Specifications:
1.2 engine model, 1.3 engine
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A model, 1.4 engine model and 1.5
spark plug that is too loose can SOHC engine model
IGNITION COILS
overheat and damage the engine. NGK: BKR6E-11
Overtightening can cause damage to DENSO: K20PR-U11
the threads in the cylinder head.
Spark Plug Gap:
8. Install the ignition coil. Reinstall 1.1 mm (0.04 in) 00.1 mm
the bolt.

9. Push the wire connector onto the


ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.

10.Repeat this procedure for the


other seven spark plugs.

11.Reinstall the cover. Secure the


cover by tightening the two
holding bolts with a wrench.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 305

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:28 32SAA650_309

Spark Plugs

Replacement
(1.5 SOHC VTEC engine model)
BOLTS CONNECTOR BOLT

LOCK TAB IGNITION COIL

1. Remove the two holding bolts by 3. Use a wrench to remove the bolt 5. Remove the spark plug with a 16
using a wrench. Remove the cover holding the ignition coil. Remove mm (5/8 inch) spark plug socket.
by pulling it straight up. the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
2. Clean off any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils. 4. Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.

306 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:36 32SAA650_310

Spark Plugs

Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A


spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.

8. Push the wire connector onto the


ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.

9. Install the ignition coil. Reinstall


the bolt.

6. Put the new spark plug into the 7. Torque the spark plug. (If you do
socket, then screw it into the hole. not have a torque wrench, tighten
Screw it in by hand so you do not the spark plug 2/3 of a turn after it
crossthread it. contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgfm , 13 lbfft)

CONTINUED

Maintenance 307

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:44 32SAA650_311

Spark Plugs

Specifications:
1.5 SOHC VTEC engine model
NGK: IZFR6K13
IGNITION COILS DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13

Iridium spark plug does not need


the gap adjustment.

Brazil, Argentina, Chile models


NGK: ZFR6J-11
DENSO: KJ20CR-L11

Spark Plug Gap:


1.1 mm (0.04 in)00.1 mm

10.Repeat this procedure for the


other three spark plugs.

11.Reinstall the cover. Secure the


cover by tightening the two
holding bolts with a wrench.

308 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:52 32SAA650_312

Battery

Check the condition of your vehicles Emergency Procedures


battery monthly. You should check
the colour of the test indicator The battery contains sulfuric Eyes Flush with water from a cup
window, and for corrosion on the acid (electrolyte) which is or other container for at least 15
terminals. highly corrosive and minutes. (Water under pressure can
poisonous. damage the eye.) Call a physician
immediately.
Getting electrolyte in your
The battery gives off eyes or on your skin can Skin Remove contaminated
explosive hydrogen gas cause serious burns. Wear clothing. Flush the skin with large
during normal operation. A protective clothing and eye quantities of water. Call a physician
spark or open flame can protection when working on immediately.
cause the battery to explode or near the battery.
with enough force to kill or Swallowing Drink water or milk.
seriously hurt you. Swallowing electrolyte can Call a physician immediately.
cause fatal poisoning if
Keep all sparks, open flames, immediate action is not
and smoking materials away taken.
from the battery.
KEEP OUT OF THE REACH OF
Wear protective clothing and CHILDREN
a face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 309

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:50:57 32SAA650_313

Battery

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.

For some types

Check the battery condition by


looking at the test indicator window
on the battery. The label on the
battery explains the test indicators
colours.

310 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:03 32SAA650_314

Battery

If you need to connect the battery to


a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicles
electrical system.

On vehicles with drivers window auto


feature
If your vehicles battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
AUTO feature of the drivers window
will be disabled. You should reset the
For some types AUTO feature (see page 135 ).

If the terminals are severely cor-


roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative () cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 311

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/13 18:22:09 32SAA650_315

Battery, Replacing the Battery

Replacing the Battery

Charging the battery with the cables On vehicles with automatic transmission BATTERY NEGATIVE BATTERY
BRACKET TERMINAL STAY
connected can seriously damage (For some types)
your vehicles electronic controls. Whenever the battery has been
Detach the battery cables before disconnected, wait more than 10
connecting the battery to a charger. seconds after turning the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position before
On vehicles with audio system you start the engine.
When the battery is disconnected,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be cancelled. You will need to
reset the clock according to the POSITIVE TERMINAL COVER NUT
instructions of the audio system.
(For EU countries)
When you remove and replace the
battery, always follow the
maintenance instructions.

1. Make sure the ignition switch is in


the LOCK (0) position.

2. Open the bonnet.

312 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:23 32SAA650_316

Replacing the Battery

4. Open the positive battery terminal To install a new battery, reverse this
cover. Loosen the bolt on the procedure.
positive battery cable, then
disconnect the cable from the This symbol on the battery
positive () terminal. means that this product must
not be treated as household
5. Loosen the nut on each side of the waste.
battery bracket with a wrench.

6. Pull the bottom end of each


battery stay out of the hole on the An improperly disposed of battery
battery base, and remove the can be harmful to the environment
POSITIVE TERMINAL combination of the battery bracket and human health.
and the stays. Always confirm local regulations for
3. Loosen the bolt on the negative battery disposal.
battery cable, then disconnect the 7. Remove the battery cover.
cable from the negative ()
terminal. 8. Take out the battery carefully.

Always disconnect the negative


() cable first, and reconnect it
last.

Maintenance 313

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:30 32SAA650_317

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS


blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the LOCK TAB
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Raise the wiper arm off the 2. Disconnect the blade assembly
windscreen. from the wiper arm by pushing in
Raise the drivers side first, then the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
the passengers side. while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.

Do not open the bonnet when the


wiper arms are raised, or you will
damage the bonnet and the arms.

314 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:38 32SAA650_318

Wiper Blades

5. Slide the new wiper blade into the


BLADE BLADE holder fully.

6. Slide the wiper blade assembly


onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down against


the windscreen.
Lower the passengers side first,
then the drivers side.
REINFORCEMENT

3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grasping the closed end of the they have no plastic or metal rein-
blade. Pull firmly until the open forcement along the back edge,
end comes out of the holder. remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.

Maintenance 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:47 32SAA650_319

Wiper Blades

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

To replace the rear wiper blade: 4. Examine the new wiper blade. If it 6. Insert both ends of the blade into
has no plastic or metal rein- the holder. Make sure they are
1. Raise the wiper arm off the forcement along the back edge, secure.
windscreen. remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and 7. Lower the wiper arm.
2. Pull one end of the blade out from install them in the slots along the
the holder. edge of the new blade.

3. Slide the blade out of the holder. 5. Slide the new blade into the holder.
Make sure it is engaged in the slot
along its full length.

316 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:51:53 32SAA650_320

Air Conditioning System (For some types)

AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER


Periodically check the engines If the air conditioning does not get as
radiator and air conditioning cold as before, have your dealer
condenser for leaves, insects, and check the system. Recharge the
dirt stuck to the front surface. These system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
block the air flow and reduce cooling (R-134a).
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.

Whenever you have the air condi-


tioning system serviced, make sure
The condenser and radiator fins the service facility uses a refrigerant
bend easily. Only use a low-pressure recycling system. This system
spray or soft-bristle brush to clean captures the refrigerant for reuse.
Your vehicles air conditioning is a them. Releasing refrigerant into the
sealed system. Any major mainte- atmosphere can damage the environ-
nance, such as recharging, should be Run the air conditioning at least once ment.
done by a qualified technician. You a week during the cold weather
can do a couple of things to make months. Run it for at least 10
sure the air conditioning works minutes while you are driving at a
efficiently. steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.

Maintenance 317

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:02 32SAA650_321

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

The dust and pollen filter removes The dust and pollen filter should be Replacement
pollen and dust that is brought in replaced at short intervals if you
from the outside through the heating drive primarily in urban areas that TABS
and cooling system/climate control have high concentrations of soot in
system. the air from industry and diesel-
powered vehicles. Replace it more
This filter should be replaced during often if air flow from the heating and
scheduled maintenance in this cooling system/climate control
owners manual. system becomes less than usual.

In EU countries, follow the


Maintenance Schedule in the
separate service information booklet TRAY BOX
that came with your vehicle.
The dust and pollen filter is located
behind the glove box.
To replace it:

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the tray box by pulling


the three tabs.

318 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:08 32SAA650_322

Dust and Pollen Filter (For some types)

5. Install the new filter. Reinstall the


filter case and tray box. Make sure
TABS the arrows of the AIR FLOW
marks on the filter point to the air
flow direction(downward).

6. Close the glove box.

If you are not sure how to replace


the dust and pollen filter, have it
replaced by your dealer.

DUST AND POLLEN FILTER CASE

3. Remove the dust and pollen filter 4. Remove the filter by pulling it
case behind the tray box by pulling straight out of the filter case.
the tabs on each side of the case.

Maintenance 319

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:18 32SAA650_323

Drive Belts

Drive Belts On vehicles with Electric Power


Steering (EPS), there is no power
On vehicles without A/C steering belt. Check the compressor On vehicles with A/C
belt only (the alternator belt on
vehicles without air conditioning
system).

ALTERNATOR BELT COMPRESSOR BELT

Check the condition of the drive (On vehicles without A/C)


belts. Examine the edges of each Alternator belt:
belt for cracks or fraying. 7.510.5 mm (0.300.41 in)
Check the tension of the belt by
pushing on it with your thumb (On vehicles with A/C)
midway between the pulleys. Compressor belt:
2.04.5 mm (0.080.18 in)

320 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:26 32SAA650_324

Tyres

To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Check the pressure in the tyres
tyres must be the proper type and Keeping the tyres properly inflated when they are cold. This means the
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of vehicle has been parked for at least 3
tread, and correctly inflated. The handling, tread life, and riding hours. If you have to drive the
following pages give more detailed comfort. Underinflated tyres wear vehicle before checking the tyre
information on how and when to unevenly, adversely affect handling pressure, the tyres can still be
check air pressure, how to inspect and fuel economy, and are more considered cold if you drive less
your tyres for damage and wear, and likely to fail from being overheated. than 1.6 km (1 mile).
what to do when your tyres need to Overinflated tyres can make your
be replaced. vehicle ride more harshly, are more If you check the pressure when the
prone to damage from road hazards, tyres are hot [the vehicle has been
and wear unevenly. driven several kilometers (miles)],
you will see readings 30 to 40 kPa
Using tyres that are We recommend that you visually (0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm , 4 to 6 psi) higher
excessively worn or check your tyres every day. If you than the cold reading. This is normal.
improperly inflated can cause think a tyre might be low, check it Do not let air out to match the
a crash in which you can be immediately with a tyre gauge. specified cold pressure. The tyre will
seriously hurt or killed. be underinflated.
Use a gauge to measure the air
Follow all instructions in this pressure at least once a month. Even
owners manual regarding tyres that are in good condition may
tyre inflation and lose 7 to 15 kPa (0.07 to 0.15
maintenance. kgf/cm , 1 to 2 psi) per month.
Remember to check the spare tyre at
the same time you check all the
other tyres. CONTINUED

Maintenance 321

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:35 32SAA650_325

Tyres

You should use your own tyre Inspection TREAD WEAR INDICATOR
pressure gauge and use it whenever Every time you check inflation, you
you check your tyre pressures. This should also examine the tyres for
will make it easier for you to tell if a damage, foreign objects, and wear.
pressure loss is due to a tyre
problem and not due to a variation You should look for:
between gauges.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
Recommended Tyre Pressures side of the tyre. Replace the tyre if
The recommended cold tyre you find either of these conditions.
pressures are given on the tyre
information label on the drivers Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
doorjamb. of the tyre. Replace the tyre if you
can see fabric or cord. Your vehicles tyres have wear
Tubeless tyres have some ability to indicators moulded into the tread.
self-seal if they are punctured. Excessive tread wear. When the tread wears down to that
However, because leakage is often point, you will see a 12.7 mm (1/2
very slow, you should look closely inch) wide band running across the
for punctures if a tyre starts losing tread. This shows there is less than
pressure. 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread left on
the tyre. A tyre that is this worn
gives very little traction on wet roads.
You should replace the tyre if you
can see the tread wear indicator in
three or more places around the tyre.

322 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:44 32SAA650_326

Tyres

Maintenance Make sure the installer balances the Tyre Rotation


In addition to proper inflation, wheels when you have new tyres
correct wheel alignment helps to installed. This increases riding Front
decrease tyre wear. If you find a tyre comfort and tyre life. Your vehicles
is worn unevenly, have your dealer original tyres were dynamic or spin
check the wheel alignment. balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
The tyres were properly balanced by dynamic balance.
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tyres if you feel a consis- (Only on vehicles equipped with (For non-directional (For directional
tent vibration while driving. A tyre aluminium wheels) tyres and wheels) tyres and wheels)
should always be rebalanced if it is Improper wheel weights can damage
removed from the wheel for repair. your vehicles aluminium wheels. To help increase tyre life and
Use only genuine Honda wheel distribute wear more evenly, you
weights for balancing. should have the tyres rotated every
10,000 km (6,250 miles). Move the
tyres to the positions shown in the
charts each time they are rotated.
The above illustration shows how
the tyres should be rotated on the
vehicles equipped with a compact
spare tyre or when the normal spare
tyre is not included in the tyre
rotation. CONTINUED

Maintenance 323

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:52:51 32SAA650_327

Tyres

When shopping for replacement For non-directional tyres and wheels


Replacing Tyres and Wheels
tyres, you may find that some tyres The tyres that came with your
are directional. This means they Front vehicle were selected to match the
are designed to rotate only in one performance capabilities of the
direction. If you use directional tyres, vehicle while providing the best
they should be rotated only front-to- combination of handling, ride
back. comfort, and long life. You should
replace them with radial tyres of the
Refer to the illustrations in the next same size, load range, speed rating,
column when the normal spare tyre and maximum cold tyre pressure
is also rotated. rating (as shown on the tyres
(Left-hand (Right-hand sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
drive type) drive type) tyres on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
For directional tyres and wheels accuracy.
Front

(Left-hand (Right-hand
drive type) drive type)

324 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:01 32SAA650_328

Tyres

It is best to replace all four tyres at Wheels and Tyres


the same time. If that is not possible
Installing improper tyres on or necessary, then replace the two Wheels:
your vehicle can affect front tyres or the two rear tyres as a 14 x 5 1/2 JJ
handling and stability. This pair. Replacing just one tyre can 15 x 6 JJ
can cause a crash in which seriously affect your vehicles han-
you can be seriously hurt or dling. Tyres:
killed. 175/65R14 82T
The ABS and VSA (if equipped) 185/55R15 82V
Always use the size and type work by comparing the speed of the 185/55R15 82H
of tyres recommended in the wheels. When replacing tyres, use
tyre information label on the same size originally supplied with The sizes of wheels and tyres
your vehicle. the vehicle. Tyre size and installed on your vehicle vary
construction can affect wheel speed depending on models.
and may cause the system to work
inconsistently. : These tyres can be used in the
same manner as the standard
If you ever need to replace a wheel, tyres.
make sure the wheels specifications
match those of the original wheel See the tyre information label on the
that came on your vehicle. drivers doorjamb or ask your dealer
Replacement wheels are available at for information on the proper size of
your dealer. Consult your dealer the tyres on your vehicle.
before replacing tyres.

Maintenance 325

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:07 32SAA650_329

Tyres

Winter Tyres Install the winter tyres according to Tyre Chains


Because of the limited qualification the remarks in the registration paper. Use snow chains only in an
for limited use of summer tyres we According to the EEC Directive for emergency or when they are legally
recommend the use of winter tyres types, when winter tyres are used, it required for driving through a
(MS tyres) on snowy and icy roads. is necessary to affix a sticker with certain area. Install the snow chains
If MS tyres are installed, all 4 the allowable max. speed of the on the front wheels. Use greater
wheels should be equipped to insure winter tyres clearly in the field of caution when driving with snow
safe driving. Use only tyres of the view of the driver, if the max. chains on snow or ice. They may
same brand with the same profile. designed for speed of the vehicle is have less-predictable handling than
Pay attention to the tyre size, load higher than the allowed max. speed good winter tyres without chains.
capacity and speed class when of the winter tyres. A sticker is Some snow chains may damage the
buying. obtainable from your tyre dealer. If vehicles tyres, wheels, suspension
any questions arise, please discuss and body. Choose only fine linked
these with one of our dealers. chains which guarantee enough free
space between the tyre and the other
vehicle parts in the wheelhouse. Pay
attention to the sectional assembly
view and other directions from the
chain manufacturer. Consult your
dealer before purchasing any type of
chains for your vehicle.

326 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:14 32SAA650_330

Tyres

When you have installed tyre chains, (EU models)


drive at less than 30 km/h (19 mph) Use only the specified chains or their equivalents for your tyres as listed.
on roads covered with snow or ice.
To minimize tyre and chain wear, Tyre Size Chain Type
avoid driving on cleared roads with
chains installed. 175/65R14 RUD Matic classic 48473 or equivalents

185/55R15 RUD Matic classic 48476 or equivalents



: If your vehicle uses 175/65R14 82T tyres, dont install tyres more than 15
inches in diameter. It may cause damage to the tyres and body of the
vehicle.

Maintenance 327

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:18 32SAA650_331

Lights

Check the operation of your vehicles


exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
POSITION LIGHT
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicles visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
SIDE TURN
drivers. SIGNAL LIGHT1,2

SIDE TURN
SIGNAL LIGHTS1

HEADLIGHT
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LIGHTS
FRONT FOG LIGHT1
1 : For some types
2 : Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.

328 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:25 32SAA650_332

Lights

Check the following:


HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT1,2
For some types
Headlights (low and high beam)
REAR TURN Position lights
SIGNAL LIGHT Tail-lights
STOP/TAIL-LIGHT2 Brake lights
BACK-UP LIGHT Turn signals
Side turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
Licence plate lights
High-mount brake light
STOP/TAIL-LIGHT Rear fog light (for some types)
Front fog lights (for some types)
REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 393 to
REAR FOG LIGHT1 determine what type of replacement
(Right handle) bulb is needed.
REAR FOG LIGHT1 BACK-UP LIGHT
(Left handle)
LICENCE PLATE
LIGHTS
1: For some types
2: Replacement of these bulbs should be done by your dealer.

Maintenance 329

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:33 32SAA650_333

Lights

Headlight Aiming Headlights with High Voltage Replacing a Headlight Bulb


(For some types) Discharge Tubes Your vehicle has halogen headlight
Except for vehicles with headlight (For some types) bulbs, one on each side. When
adjuster The low beam headlight bulbs are a replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
The headlights were properly aimed type of high voltage discharge tube. base and protect the glass from
when your vehicle was new. If you High voltage can remain in the contact with your skin or hard
regularly carry heavy items in the circuit even with the light switch off objects. If you touch the glass, clean
luggage area or pull a trailer, and the key removed. Because of it with denatured alcohol and a clean
readjustment may be required. this, you should not attempt to cloth.
Adjustment of the headlights should examine or change a low beam
be performed by your dealer or headlight bulb yourself. If a low
other qualified technician. beam headlight bulb fails, take the
vehicle to your dealer to have it Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
On vehicles with headlight adjuster replaced. when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
The vertical angle of the headlights scratch on the glass can cause the
can be adjusted. For complete bulb to overheat and shatter.
information, see page 109 .

330 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:43 32SAA650_334

Lights

HOLDING CLIP WEATHER SEAL TAB

SLOT

CONNECTOR BULB HOLD-DOWN WIRE

1. If you are changing the bulb on 4. Remove the electrical connector 7. Insert the new bulb into the hole,
the left side, start the engine, turn from the bulb by pulling the making sure the tabs are in their
the steering wheel all the way to connector straight back. slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
the right, and turn off the engine. back in place, and clip the end into
If you are changing the bulb on 5. Remove the rubber weather seal the slot.
the right side, turn the steering by pulling it.
wheel to the left. 8. Install the rubber seal over the
6. Unclip the end of the hold-down back of the headlight assembly.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to wire from its slot. Pivot the wire Make sure it is right side up; it is
remove the two holding clips from up out of the way and remove the marked .
the inner fender. bulb.

3. Pull the inner fender cover back. CONTINUED

Maintenance 331

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:53:53 32SAA650_335

Lights

HOLD-DOWN WIRE Replacing a Front Turn Signal


Light Bulb
(Left side)
HOLDING CLIP

SLOT
BULB
9. Push the electrical connector onto
the tabs of the new bulb. Make SOCKET
sure the hold-down wire locks in
place. 1. Open the bonnet. 2. Remove the socket from the
Turn on the headlights to test the The front turn signal light is next headlight assembly by turning it
new bulb. to the headlight bulb. Use a flat- one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
tipped screwdriver to remove the
10. Put the inner fender in place. holding clip from the cover and
Install the two holding clips. Lock pull out the cover.
each clip in place by pushing on
the centre.

332 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:05 32SAA650_336

Lights

3. Pull the bulb straight out of its (Right side)


socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

4. Insert the socket back into the


headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.

5. Turn on the lights and check that


the new bulb is working.

6. Install the cover and holding clip. HOLDING CLIP BULB SOCKET
Lock it in place by pushing on the
centre. 1. Open the bonnet. 2. Remove the socket from the
The front turn signal light is next headlight assembly by turning it
to the headlight bulb. When replac- one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
ing the right bulb, first remove the
windscreen washer reservoir. Use 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove socket.
the holding clip from the reservoir. Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 333

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:15 32SAA650_337

Lights

4. Insert the socket back into the Replacing a Front Position Light/
headlight assembly. Turn it Side Turn Signal Bulb
clockwise to lock it in place.
HOLDING CLIP SOCKET
5. Turn on the lights and check that
the new bulb is working.

6. Put the windscreen washer BULBS


reservoir back in place. Install the
holding clip. Lock it in place by
pushing on the centre.
SOCKET
SIDE TURN SIGNAL
(For some types)

1. If you are changing the bulb on 3. Pull the inner fender cover back.
the left side, start the engine, turn
the steering wheel all the way to 4. Remove the socket from the
the right, and turn off the engine. headlight assembly by turning it
If you are changing the bulb on one-quarter turn anticlockwise.
the right side, turn the steering
wheel to the left. 5. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to Push the new bulb straight into
remove the two holding clips from the socket until it bottoms.
the inner fender.

334 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:24 32SAA650_338

Lights

6. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs


headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place. BULB

7. Test the lights to make sure the


new bulb is working.

8. Put the inner fender in place.


Install the two holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the centre.

COVER

1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on 2. Determine which of the four bulbs
the edge of the cover. Remove it is burned out: stop/tail-light (on
by carefully prying in the notch on some types), back-up light, turn
its middle edge with a small flat- signal light or rear fog light (on
tipped screwdriver. some types).

3. Remove the socket by turning it


one-quarter turn anticlockwise.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 335

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:34 32SAA650_339

Lights

4. Remove the burned out bulb by Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb
pulling it straight out of its socket. (For some types)
For some types
5. Install the new bulb in the socket.
BULB
6. Test the lights to make sure the
SOCKET new bulb is working.
BULBS
7. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly.
SOCKET
8. Reinstall the tail-light assembly
cover. SOCKET

1. Push the front of the turn signal


assembly toward the rear of the
vehicle and pull the assembly out.

2. Turn the socket one-quarter turn


anticlockwise to remove it from
the lens.

336 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:45 32SAA650_340

Lights

3. Pull the bulb straight out of its Replacing a Rear Licence Plate
socket. Bulb
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.

4. Put the socket back into its hole in


the lens and turn it clockwise until
it locks.

5. Test the lights to make sure the


new bulb is working.
BULB
6. Put the side turn signal assembly
back into the body, rear first. Push
on the front edge until it snaps into
place. 1. Open the tailgate. Push the rear 4. Turn on the lights and check that
licence light assembly toward the the new bulb is working.
right and pull it out of the tailgate.
5. Put the licence light assembly
2. Remove the licence light assembly back into the tailgate, the right
by squeezing the tabs on both edge first. Push the assembly to
sides of the socket. the left until it stops.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of its


socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.

Maintenance 337

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:54:53 32SAA650_341

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb For some types


(For some types)
Your vehicle uses halogen light
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its plastic case and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.

Halogen light bulbs get very hot


when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a 1. Remove the screw from the under 1: For some types
scratch on the glass can cause the cover. Remove the screws from the
bulb to overheat and shatter. under covers.

2. Push the under cover inward.

338 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:04 32SAA650_342

Lights

BULB 5. Insert the new bulb into the hole Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
and turn it one-quarter turn clock- Lights
wise to lock it in place.
FRONT CEILING LIGHT (For some types)
6. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.

7. Turn on the front fog lights to test


the new bulb.
BULB
8. Put the under cover back in place
and reinstall the one or two (for
3. Remove the electrical connector some types) screws.
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then The courtesy lights in the doors and
slide the connector off the bulb. roof come apart the same way. They
do not use the same type of bulb.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn 1. Remove the lens by carefully
anticlockwise. prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small
flat-tipped screwdriver. Do not pry
on the edge of the housing around
the lens.
CONTINUED

Maintenance 339

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:12 32SAA650_343

Lights

Replacing the Individual Map


Light Bulbs
(For some types)
REAR CEILING LIGHT LUGGAGE AREA LIGHT
BULB

BULB

Push

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it


straight out of its metal tabs. 1. Check which bulb is burned out.
Push on the lens of the opposite
3. Push the new bulb into the metal side you are replacing.
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
2. Remove the lens of the burned out
bulb by carefully prying on the
edge between the lenses with a
fingernail file or a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.

340 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:24 32SAA650_344

Lights

Replacing a High-mount Brake


Light Bulb

BULBS

BULB
SOCKET

1. Open the tailgate. 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its


3. Remove the bulb by pulling it Remove the light assembly cover socket.
straight out of the bulb holder. by pushing the tabs on both sides Push the new bulb straight into
and pulling the cover down. the socket until it bottoms.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb
holder. 2. Remove the socket from the light 4. Test the lights to make sure the
assembly by turning it one-quarter new bulb is working.
5. Reinstall the lens in place. turn anticlockwise.

CONTINUED

Maintenance 341

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:34 32SAA650_345

Lights, Storing Your Vehicle

5. Put the socket back into the light Storing Your Vehicle Leave the parking brake off. Put
assembly and turn it clockwise to If you need to park your vehicle for the transmission in reverse
lock it in place. an extended period (more than one (manual) or Park (automatic).
month), there are several things you
6. Put the cover back onto the light should do to prepare it for storage. Block the rear wheels.
assembly. Push it up until it locks Proper preparation helps prevent
in place. deterioration and makes it easier to If the vehicle is to be stored for a
get your vehicle back on the road. If longer period, it should be
possible, store your vehicle indoors. supported on jackstands so the
tyres are off the ground.
Fill the fuel tank.
Disconnect the battery.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely. Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
Clean the interior. Make sure the rag so they do not touch the
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are windscreen.
completely dry.

342 Maintenance

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:39 32SAA650_346

Storing Your Vehicle

To minimize sticking, apply a If you store your vehicle for 1 year or : In EU countries, follow the
silicone spray lubricant to all door longer, have your dealer perform the Maintenance Schedule in the
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a inspections called for in the 2 years/ separate service information
vehicle body wax to the painted 40,000 km (25,000 miles) booklet that came with your
surfaces that mate with the door maintenance schedule as soon as vehicle.
and tailgate seals. you take it out of storage (see page
278 ). The replacements called for in
Cover the vehicle with a the maintenance schedule are not
breathable cover, one made needed unless the vehicle has
from a porous material such as actually reached that time or
cotton. Nonporous materials, such distance.
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for a


while periodically (preferably once
a month).

Maintenance 343

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:41 32SAA650_347

344

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:45 32SAA650_348

Appearance Care

Regular cleaning and polishing of Exterior Care.................................. 346


your vehicle helps to keep it new Washing ...................................... 346
looking. This section gives you hints Roof Antenna ............................. 347
on how to clean your vehicle and Waxing ........................................ 347
preserve its appearance: the paint, Aluminium Wheels .................... 348
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also Paint Touch-up ........................... 348
included are several things you can Interior Care ................................... 349
do to help prevent corrosion. Carpeting .................................... 349
Floor Mats .................................. 349
Fabric .......................................... 350
Vinyl ............................................ 350
Leather ........................................ 350
Seat Belts .................................... 350
Windows ..................................... 351
Air Fresheners ........................... 351
Corrosion Protection ..................... 352

Appearance Care 345

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:55:54 32SAA650_349

Exterior Care

Washing Check the body for road tar, tree


Frequent washing helps preserve sap, etc. Remove these stains with
your vehicles beauty. Dirt and grit When washing the vehicle with a tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
can scratch the paint, while tree sap high pressure washing system, the off immediately so it does not
and bird droppings can permanently fuel fill door may flip open and the harm the finish. Remember to re-
ruin the finish. vehicle may be damaged. Confirm wax these areas, even if the rest of
that the fuel fill door is locked before the vehicle does not need waxing.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area, carrying out high pressure washing.
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is When you have washed and rinsed
parked in the sun, move it into the Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with the whole exterior, dry it with a
shade and let the exterior cool down cool water to remove loose dirt. chamois or soft towel. Letting it
before you start. air-dry will cause dulling and water
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix spots.
Only use the solvents and cleaners in a product made especially for
recommended in this owners car washing. As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
manual. chips and scratches that could allow
Wash the vehicle using the water corrosion to start. Repair them with
and detergent solution and a soft- touch-up paint (see page 348 ).
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Chemical solvents and strong Start at the top and work your way
cleaners can damage the paint, metal, down. Rinse frequently.
and plastic on your vehicle.

346 Appearance Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:03 32SAA650_350

Exterior Care

Antenna Waxing Polishes Polishes and cleaner/


Roof Antenna Always wash and dry the whole waxes can restore the shine to paint
vehicle before waxing it. You should that has oxidized and lost some of its
60
wax your vehicle, including the metal shine. They normally contain mild
trim, whenever water sits on the abrasives and solvents that remove
surface in large patches. It should the top layer of the finish. You
form into beads or droplets after should use a polish on your vehicle if
waxing. the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
instructions on the container. In removers also takes off the wax.
general, there are two types of Remember to re-wax those areas,
products: even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Waxes A wax coats the finish and
antenna on the centre front of the protects it from damage by exposure
roof. Before using a drive-through to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
car washer, make sure you remove should use a wax on your vehicle
the antenna by unscrewing it by when it is new.
hand. This prevents the antenna
from being damaged by the car
washer brushes.

Appearance Care 347

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:10 32SAA650_351

Exterior Care

Aluminium Wheels Paint Touch-up Chemical solvents or strong cleaners


(For some types) Your dealer has touch-up paint to may cause discolouration or stain the
Clean your vehicles aluminium alloy match your vehicles colour. The seat or other interior parts. Be
wheels as you do the rest of the colour code is printed on a sticker on careful when you use such a
exterior. Wash them with the same the drivers doorjamb or a plate chemical agent when cleaning the
solution, and rinse them thoroughly. attached to the frame behind the interior components.
radiator. Take this code to your
The wheels have a protective clear- dealer so you are sure to get the
coat that keeps the aluminium from correct colour.
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some Inspect your vehicle frequently for
commercial wheel cleaners or stiff chips or scratches in the paint.
brushes, can damage this clear-coat. Repair them right away to prevent
Only use a mild detergent and soft corrosion of the metal underneath.
brush or sponge to clean the wheels. Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.

348 Appearance Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:17 32SAA650_352

Interior Care

Carpeting Floor Mats If you remove the floor mat, make


Vacuum the carpeting frequently to sure to re-anchor it when you put it
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make back in your vehicle.
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to If you replace it, use a genuine
keep it looking new. Use one of the Honda floor mat that is designed to
foam-type carpet cleaners on the be used with the floor mat anchor in
market. Follow the instructions that your vehicle.
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the carpeting as dry as possible by the drivers footwell, make sure it
not adding water to the foam. fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.

For some types Do not put additional floor mats on


The genuine Honda drivers floor top of the anchored mat, otherwise
mat was designed to hook over the the additional mats may slide
floor mat anchors. This keeps the forward and interfere with the pedals.
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.

Appearance Care 349

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:26 32SAA650_353

Interior Care

Fabric Leather Seat Belts


Vacuum dirt and dust out of the (For some types)
material frequently. For general Vacuum dirt and dust from the LOOP
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap leather frequently. Pay particular
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry. attention to the pleats and seams.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a Clean the leather with a soft cloth
commercially-available fabric cleaner. dampened with clear water, then
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
first, to make sure it does not bleach further cleaning is needed, use a
or stain the fabric. Follow the soap specifically for leather, such as
instructions that come with the saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
cleaner. damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and
buff as described above.
Vinyl
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum If you use a leather cleaner, wipe it If your seat belts get dirty, you can
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft off quickly with a soft and dry cloth. use a soft brush with a mixture of
cloth dampened in a solution of mild Never leave a cloth soaked with mild soap and warm water to clean
soap and water. Use the same leather cleaner on any part of the them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
solution with a soft-bristle brush on interior. If left for a long time, some cleaning solvents. They can weaken
more difficult spots. You can also use leather cleaners may cause the belt material. Let the belts air-
commercially-available spray or discolouration or cracking of interior dry before you use the vehicle.
foam-type vinyl cleaners. trim or fabric.

350 Appearance Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:33 32SAA650_354

Interior Care

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat Air Fresheners


belt anchors can cause the belts to If you want to use an air freshener/
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of The rear window demister is bonded deodorizer in the interior of your
the loops with a clean cloth to the inside of the glass. Wiping vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
dampened in mild soap and warm vigorously up-and-down can dislodge Some liquid air fresheners contain
water or isopropyl alcohol. and break these wires. When chemicals that may cause parts of
cleaning the rear window, use gentle the interior trim and fabric to crack
Windows pressure and wipe side-to-side. or discolour.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass If you use a liquid air freshener,
cleaner. You can also use a mixture make sure you fasten it securely so it
of one part white vinegar to 10 parts does not spill as you drive.
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.

Appearance Care 351

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:41 32SAA650_355

Corrosion Protection

Two factors normally contribute to Many corrosion-preventive measures Use a high-pressure spray to clean
causing corrosion in your vehicle: are built into your vehicle. You can the underside of your vehicle. This
help keep your vehicle from is especially important in areas
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities. corroding by performing some that use road salt in winter. It is
Dirt and road salt that collects in simple periodic maintenance: also a good idea in humid climates
hollows on the underside of the and areas subject to salt air.
vehicle stays damp, promoting Repair chips and scratches in the Vehicles equipped with ABS have
corrosion in that area. paint as soon as you discover them. a sensor and wiring at each wheel.
Be careful not to damage them.
2. Removal of paint and protective Inspect and clean out the drain
coatings from the exterior and holes in the bottom of the doors Have the corrosion-preventive
underside of the vehicle. and body. coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
Check the floor coverings for periodically.
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.

352 Appearance Care

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:45 32SAA650_356

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more- Compact Spare Tyre...................... 354


common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tyre .................... 355
experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Wont Start ........... 361
gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the Starter
safely evaluate the problem and what Motor Operates Very
to do to correct it. If the problem has Slowly .................................. 361
stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates
you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................. 362
If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................. 363
on getting your vehicle towed. If Your Engine Overheats............. 366
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 368
Charging System Indicator........... 369
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 370
Brake System Indicator ................ 371
Opening the Fuel Fill Door........... 372
Closing the Sunroof ....................... 373
Fuses ............................................... 374
Checking and Replacing
Fuses ....................................... 375
Emergency Towing ....................... 381

Taking Care of the Unexpected 353

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:56:55 32SAA650_357

Compact Spare Tyre (For some types)

Your vehicle has a compact spare Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
tyre that takes up less space. Use compact spare.
this spare tyre as a temporary Do not use the compact spare tyre
replacement only. Get your regular if you are towing a trailer. Towing
tyre repaired or replaced and put it a trailer is applicable on some
back on your vehicle as soon as you models.
can. The wheel of the compact spare
tyre is designed especially to fit
Check the inflation pressure of the your vehicle. Do not use your
compact spare tyre every time you spare tyre on another vehicle
check the other tyres. It should be unless it is the same make and
inflated to: model. TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm , 60 psi) Do not use more than one
compact spare tyre at the same The compact spare tyre has a
Follow these precautions whenever time. shorter tread life than a regular tyre.
you are using the compact spare The spare tyre is smaller than the Replace it when you can see the
tyre: regular tyre, reducing your tread wear indicator bars. The
vehicles ground clearance. Such replacement should be the same size
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph) things as road debris and parking and design tyre, mounted on the
under any circumstances. speed bumps could possibly same wheel. The compact spare tyre
This tyre gives a harsher ride and damage the underside of your is not designed to be mounted on a
less traction on some road sur- vehicle. regular wheel, and the compact
faces than the regular tyre. Use Turn the VSA system (If wheel is not designed for mounting a
greater caution while driving on equipped) off (see page 265 ). regular tyre.
this tyre. Driving with the compact spare
tyre may activate the VSA system.

354 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:07 32SAA650_358

Changing a Flat Tyre

If you have a flat tyre while driving, 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
stop in a safe place to change it. non-slippery ground, away from
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder Use the jack that came with your traffic. Put the transmission in
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive vehicle. If you try to raise another Park (automatic) or reverse
slowly along the shoulder until you vehicle with this jack or use another (manual). Apply the parking brake.
get to an exit or an area to stop that jack to raise your vehicle, the vehicle
is far away from the traffic lanes. or jack can be damaged. For some types
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
Jack Label for EU models the trailer.

The vehicle can easily roll off 1. 2. 3. 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
the jack, seriously injuring and turn the ignition switch to the
anyone underneath. LOCK (0) position. Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
Follow the directions for while you change the tyre.
changing a tyre exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by 1. See Owners Manual.
the jack.
2. Never get under vehicle when
supported by jack.

3. Place jack underneath reinforced


area.

See page 393 for your jack type. CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 355

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:18 32SAA650_359

Changing a Flat Tyre

HOOK STRAP EXTENSION

TOOL KIT JACK

For some types


TOOL KIT JACK WHEEL COVER

3. Open the tailgate. Raise the 5. Take the jack out of the luggage On some types, remove the wheel
luggage area floor by lifting up on area. cover from the wheel with the
the strap. extension.
To keep the luggage area floor out Turn the jacks end bracket anticlock-
of the way, attach the hook to the wise to loosen it, then remove the
tailgate sill. jack by lifting it straight up.

4. Take the tool kit out of the spare 6. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
tyre well. the spare tyre out of its well.

7. Place blocks in front and back of


the wheel diagonally opposite the
tyre you are changing.

356 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:25 32SAA650_360

Changing a Flat Tyre

EXTENSION

WHEEL WRENCH JACKING POINT WHEEL WRENCH

8. Loosen the four wheel nuts 1/2 9. Locate the jacking point nearest 10.Use the extension and wheel
turn with the wheel wrench. the tyre you need to change. It is wrench as shown to raise the
pointed to by an arrow moulded vehicle until the flat tyre is off the
into the underside of the body. ground.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 357

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:32 32SAA650_361

Changing a Flat Tyre

WHEEL NUTS BRAKE HUB

11.Remove the wheel nuts. 12. Remove the flat tyre. Temporarily 13.Before mounting the spare tyre,
place the flat tyre on the ground wipe any dirt off the mounting
with the outside surface of the surface of the wheel and hub with
wheel facing up. You could scratch a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
the wheel if you put it face down. carefully, it may be hot from
driving.

358 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:38 32SAA650_362

Changing a Flat Tyre

14. Put on the spare tyre. Put the 15. Lower the vehicle to the ground 16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, and remove the jack. the same crisscross pattern. Have
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at
pattern with the wheel wrench the nearest automotive service
until the wheel is firmly against facility.
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully. Tighten the wheel nuts to:
108 Nm (11 kgfm , 80 lbfft)

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 359

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:48 32SAA650_363

Changing a Flat Tyre

For compact spare tyre 21. Store the jack in its holder. Turn
For normal tyre the jacks end bracket clockwise to
WING BOLT lock it in place. Store the tools.
SPACER Replace the cover.
CONE

Loose items can fly around


the interior in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
CENTRE CAP For normal tyre
For compact spare tyre
Store the wheel, jack, and
17. On some types, remove the centre 18. Place the flat tyre face down in the tools securely before driving.
cap before storing the flat tyre in spare tyre well.
the spare tyre well.
19.Remove the spacer cone from the Store the wheel cover or centre
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it cap in the luggage area. Make
back on the bolt. sure it does not get scratched or
damaged.
20. Secure the flat tyre by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole. 22.Close the tailgate.

360 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:57:58 32SAA650_364

If Your Engine Wont Start

Diagnosing why your engine wont Nothing Happens or the Starter On some manual transmission
start falls into two areas, depending Motor Operates Very Slowly models, the clutch pedal must be
on what you hear when you turn the When you turn the ignition switch to pushed all the way to the floor or the
key to the START (III) position: the START (III) position, you do not starter will not operate.
hear the normal noise of the engine
You hear nothing, or almost trying to start. You may hear a Turn the ignition switch to the ON
nothing. The engines starter clicking sound or series of clicks, or (II) position. Turn on the
motor does not operate at all, or nothing at all. headlights and check their
operates very slowly. Check these things: brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or dont light at all, the
You can hear the starter motor Your vehicle has the Immobilizer battery is discharged. See Jump
operating normally, or the starter System (on some types). You Starting on page 363 .
motor sounds like it is spinning should use a properly-coded key to
faster than normal, but the engine start the engine (see page 112 ). A Turn the ignition switch to the
does not start up and run. key that is not properly coded will START (III) position. If the
cause the immobilizer system headlights do not dim, check the
indicator in the instrument panel condition of the fuses. If the fuses
to blink rapidly. are OK, there is probably
something wrong with the
If your vehicle is equipped with an electrical circuit for the ignition
automatic transmission (CVT), switch or starter motor. You will
check the position of the shift need a qualified technician to
lever. It must be in Park or neutral. determine the problem (see
Emergency Towing on page 381 ).

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 361

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:06 32SAA650_365

If Your Engine Wont Start

If the headlights dim noticeably or The Starter Operates Normally There may be an electrical
go out when you try to start the In this case, the starter motors problem, such as no power to the
engine, either the battery is dis- speed sounds normal, or even faster fuel pump. Check all the fuses
charged or the connections are than normal, when you turn the (see page 374 ).
corroded. Check the condition of the ignition switch to the START (III)
battery and terminal connections position, but the engine does not run. On vehicles with a fuel cutoff
(see page 309 ). You can then try system, the fuel cutoff switch may
jump starting the vehicle from a Are you using the proper starting be activated. If the switch is
booster battery (see page 363 ). procedure? Refer to Starting the activated, it must be reset before
Engine on page 247 . starting the engine (see page 237 ).

Do you have petrol? Turn the If you find nothing wrong, you will
ignition switch to the ON (II) need a qualified technician to find
position for a minute and watch the problem. See Emergency
the fuel gauge. The low fuel level Towing on page 381 .
warning light may not be working,
so you were not reminded to fill
the tank.

362 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:13 32SAA650_366

Jump Starting

If your vehicles battery has run For some types


down, you may be able to start the
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.

A battery can explode if you


do not follow the correct
procedure, seriously injuring BOOSTER BATTERY BOOSTER BATTERY
anyone nearby.
The numbers in the illustration show
Keep all sparks, open flames, you the order to connect the jumper
and smoking materials away cables. Make sure to disconnect the
from the battery. cables in the reverse order.

You cannot start your vehicle with an


automatic transmission (CVT) by
pushing or pulling it.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 363

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:21 32SAA650_367

Jump Starting

To jump start your vehicle, follow


these directions closely:

1. Open the bonnet and check the


physical condition of the battery
(see page 309 ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.

For some types

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
electrolyte inside can freeze. positive () terminal on your
Attempting to jump start with a vehicles battery. Connect the
frozen battery can cause it to rupture. other end to the positive ()
terminal on the booster battery.
2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, audio system,
lights, etc.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.

364 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:29 32SAA650_368

Jump Starting

5. If the booster battery is in another


vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start your vehicle. If the starter


motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metal-
to-metal contact.

7. Once your vehicle is running,


For some types disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
4. Connect the second jumper cable booster battery. Disconnect the
to the negative () terminal on positive cable from your vehicle,
the booster battery. Connect the then the booster battery.
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this Keep the ends of the jumper cables
jumper cable to any other part of away from each other and any metal
the engine. on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.

Taking Care of the Unexpected 365

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:37 32SAA650_369

If Your Engine Overheats

The high temperature indicator 3. If you do not see steam or spray,


should not come on under most leave the engine running and
conditions. It may begin to blink if Steam and spray from an watch the high temperature
you are driving up a long steep hill overheated engine can indicator. If the high heat is due to
on a very hot day. If it comes on, you seriously scald you. overloading (climbing a long,
should determine the reason. steep hill on a hot day with the
Do not open the bonnet if A/C running, for example), the
steam is coming out. engine should start to cool down
almost immediately. If it does, wait
Driving when the high temperature until the high temperature
indicator keeps coming on can cause 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. indicator turns off, then continue
serious damage to your engine. Put the transmission in neutral or driving.
Park, and set the parking brake.
Your vehicle can overheat for several Turn off the heating and cooling/ 4. If the high temperature indicator
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a climate control system and all still turns on, turn off the engine.
mechanical problem. If the high other accessories. Turn on the
temperature indicator turns on with hazard warning lights. 5. Wait until you see no more signs
the engine running or you see steam of steam or spray, then open the
or spray coming from under the 2. If you see steam and/or spray bonnet.
bonnet, you should take immediate coming from under the bonnet,
action. turn off the engine.

366 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:45 32SAA650_370

If Your Engine Overheats

6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, 10. Start the engine and set the
such as a split radiator hose. temperature control dial to
Everything is still extremely hot, Removing the radiator cap maximum. Add coolant to the
so use caution. If you find a leak, it while the engine is hot can radiator up to the base of the filler
must be repaired before you cause the coolant to spray neck. If you do not have the
continue driving (see Emergency out, seriously scalding you. proper coolant mixture available,
Towing on page 381 ). you can add plain water.
Always let the engine and Remember to have the cooling
7. If you dont find an obvious leak, radiator cool down before system drained and refilled with
check the coolant level in the removing the radiator cap. the proper mixture as soon as you
radiator reserve tank (see page can.
236 ). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway 9. Using gloves or a large heavy 11.Put the radiator cap back on
between the MIN and MAX marks. cloth, turn the radiator cap anti- tightly. Run the engine and watch
clockwise, without pushing down, the high temperature indicator. If
8. If there was no coolant in the to the first stop. This releases any it turns on again, the engine needs
reserve tank, you may also have to remaining pressure in the cooling repair (see Emergency Towing
add coolant to the radiator. Let the system. After the pressure on page 381 ).
engine cool down until the high releases, push down on the cap
temperature indicator turns off and turn it until it comes off. 12.If the temperature stays normal,
before checking the radiator. check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

Taking Care of the Unexpected 367

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:53 32SAA650_371

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the


level back to the full mark on the
Running the engine with low oil dipstick (see page 286 ).
pressure can cause serious mechani-
cal damage almost immediately. 4. Start the engine and watch the low
Turn off the engine as soon as you oil pressure indicator. If the light
can safely get the vehicle stopped. does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
1. Safely pull off the road and shut mechanical problem that needs to
off the engine. Turn on the hazard be repaired before you can
warning lights. continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 381 ).
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
This indicator should light when the Open the bonnet and check the oil
ignition switch is in the ON (II) level (see page 234 ). Although oil
position, and go out after the engine level and oil pressure are not
starts. It should never come on when directly connected, an engine that
the engine is running. If it starts is very low on oil can lose pressure
flashing, it indicates that the oil during cornering and other driving
pressure dropped very low for a manoeuvres.
moment, then recovered. If the
indicator stays on with the engine
running, it shows that the engine has
lost oil pressure and serious engine
damage is possible. In either case,
you should take immediate action.

368 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:58:59 32SAA650_372

Charging System Indicator

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR Immediately turn off all electrical By eliminating as much of the
accessories: radio, heater, A/C, rear electrical load as possible, you can
demister, etc. Try not to use other drive several kilometers (miles)
electrically-operated controls such as before the battery is too discharged
the power windows. Keep the engine to keep the engine running. Drive to
running and take extra care not to a service station or garage where
stall it. Starting the engine will you can get technical assistance.
discharge the battery rapidly.

This indicator should come on when


the ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position, and go out after the engine
starts. If it comes on brightly when
the engine is running, it indicates
that the charging system has
stopped charging the battery.

Taking Care of the Unexpected 369

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:05 32SAA650_373

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP If this indicator comes on, safely pull


off the road and turn off the engine.
Restart the engine and watch the If you keep driving with the
indicator. If it stays on, have your malfunction indicator lamp on, you
vehicle checked by the dealer as can damage your vehicles emissions
soon as possible. Drive moderately controls and engine. Those repairs
until the dealer has inspected the may not be covered by your vehicles
problem. Avoid full-throttle warranties.
acceleration and driving at high
speed.

You should also have the dealer


inspect your vehicle if the indicator
This indicator comes on for a few comes on frequently, even though it
seconds when you turn the ignition goes off when you follow the above
switch to the ON (II) position. If it procedure.
comes on at any other time, it
indicates one of the engines
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your vehicles
performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause your vehicle to
put out excessive emissions.
Continued operation may cause
serious damage.

370 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:12 32SAA650_374

Brake System Indicator

brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on Slow down by shifting to a lower


the brake pedal to see if it feels gear, and pull to the side of the road
normal. If it does, check the brake when it is safe. Because of the
fluid level the next time you stop at a longer distance needed to stop, it is
service station (see page 299 ). If the hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to should have it towed, and repaired as
your dealer and have the brake soon as possible (see Emergency
system inspected for leaks or worn Towing on page 381 ).
brake pads.
If you must drive the vehicle a short
However, if the brake pedal does not distance in this condition, drive
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR feel normal, you should take slowly and cautiously.
immediate action. Because of the
The Brake System Indicator is a brake systems dual-circuit design, a On vehicles with ABS
reminder to check the parking brake. problem in one part of the system If the ABS indicator comes on with
On some types, it normally comes on will still give you braking at two this indicator, have the vehicle
when you turn the ignition switch to wheels. You will feel the brake pedal inspected by your dealer
the ON (II) position. go down much further before the immediately.
This indicator comes on and stays lit vehicle begins to slow down, and you
if you do not fully release the will have to press harder on the
parking brake. pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicles
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the

Taking Care of the Unexpected 371

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:18 32SAA650_375

Opening the Fuel Fill Door

When you are unable to unlock the


fuel fill door, as an emergency
operation, move the actuator aside
from the luggage area and unlock
the fuel fill door.

SCREWS

COVER ACTUATOR UNIT

1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on 2. Loosen the two screws and move
the edge of the cover. Remove it the actuator unit to the rear.
by carefully prying in the notch on
its middle edge with a small flat- As you move the actuator back to
tipped screwdriver. the original position, the door will be
locked.

372 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:27 32SAA650_376

Closing the Sunroof (For some types)

If the electric motor will not close ROUND PLUG SOCKET


the sunroof, do the following:

1. Check the fuse for the sunroof


motor (see page 375 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.

2. Try closing the sunroof. If the new


fuse blows immediately or the
sunroof motor still does not SUNROOF WRENCH
operate, you can close the sunroof
manually.
4. Use a screwdriver or coin to 5. Insert the sunroof wrench into the
3. Get the sunroof wrench out of the remove the round plug in the socket behind this plug. Turn the
tool kit in the luggage area. centre of the headliner. wrench until the sunroof is fully
closed.

6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the


round plug.

If you need to close the sunroof


manually, it means the sunroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected 373

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:33 32SAA650_377

Fuses

All the electrical circuits in your INTERIOR UNDER-BONNET


vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in two fuse
boxes.

TAB

The interior fuse box is underneath The under-bonnet fuse box is located
the steering column. To remove the in the back of the engine
fuse box lid, pull it toward you and compartment on the drivers side. To
take the lid out of its hinges. open it, push the tabs as shown.

374 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/13 18:22:20 32SAA650_378

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses


If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on page
377 to 380 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the components BLOWN FUSE PULLER
operation.
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. (EU models)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the the under-bonnet fuse box by Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the looking through the top at the wire under-bonnet fuse box and all the
headlights and all other inside. Removing these fuses fuses in the interior fuse box by
accessories are off. requires a Phillips-head screw- pulling out each fuse with the fuse
driver. puller provided in the interior fuse
2. Remove the cover from the fuse box.
box. (Except EU models)
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-bonnet fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each fuse.
CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 375

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:50 32SAA650_379

Fuses

BLOWN
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a fuse with one that has a
of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the
from one of the other circuits. Make chances of damaging the electrical
sure you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a replace-
temporarily (such as the accessory ment fuse with the proper rating for
power socket, cigarette lighter, or the circuit, install one with a lower
radio). rating.

If you replace the blown fuse with a 6. If the replacement fuse of the
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it same rating blows in a short time,
might blow out again. This does not there is probably a serious
5. Look for a blown wire inside the indicate anything wrong. Replace the electrical problem in your vehicle.
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with fuse with one of the correct rating as Leave the blown fuse in that
one of the spare fuses of the same soon as you can. circuit and have your vehicle
rating or lower. checked by a qualified technician.

376 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 09:59:57 32SAA650_380

Fuses

On vehicles with drivers window auto UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX


feature
If the drivers power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO feature of the
drivers window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature (see
page 135 ).

For some types


When the audio system is disabled,
the clock setting in the audio system
will be cancelled. You will need to
reset the clock according to the FUSE BOX LABEL (For some types)
instructions of the audio system.

CONTINUED

Taking Care of the Unexpected 377

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 10:00:04 32SAA650_381

Fuses

(For some types)


No. Circuits Protected
5 Blower Relay
6 Main Fuse Battery
7 Fog Light
Sunroof
8 Back up
9 Small Light
10 Cooling Fan
11 Condenser Fan
12 Right Headlight
13 Left Headlight
14 Hazard
The fuses contained in the under-bonnet fuse box vary 15 ABS (F/S)
slightly depending on models. On some models, the VSA (F/S)
locations of fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse 16 Horn, Stop
label. Refer to the table on this page for the fuses on your
: For some types
vehicle.
UNDER-BONNET FUSE BOX Circuits Protected
No. Circuits Protected
1 Battery Battery
2 Main Fuse EPS
: For some types (Fuses are located in the battery terminal)
3 Main Fuse Ignition
4 ABS Motor
VSA Motor

378 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 10:00:11 32SAA650_382

Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOX (For some types)

FUSE BOX LABEL (For some types) The fuses contained in the interior fuse box vary slightly
depending on models. On some models, the locations of
fuses are shown with symbols on the fuse label. Refer to
the table in the next page for the fuses on your vehicle.

CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected 379

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 10:00:16 32SAA650_383

Fuses

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Circuits Protected No. Circuits Protected

1 Back Lights 17 Front Passengers Power Window


2 Ignition Coil 2 18 Rear Fog Light
3 Meter 19 Sunroof , Heated Mirrors
4 Turn Signal Lights 20 Not Used
5 DBW 21 Front Fog Lights
6 Front Wiper 22 Not Used
7 Not Used 23 Not Used
8 Not Used 24 Ignition Coil 1
9 Rear Demister 25 ABS
10 Heater, Air Conditioning VSA
11 Fuel Pump 26 Audio
12 Rear Wiper 27 Accessory Power Socket, Cigarette
13 SRS Lighter
14 IGP 28 Door Lock
15 Rear Left Power Window 29 Drivers Power Window
16 Rear Right Power Window

: For some types

380 Taking Care of the Unexpected

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine


07/09/12 10:00:25 32SAA650_384

Emergency Towing

If your vehicle needs to be towed, Sling-type Equipment The tow Shift to D position for 5 seconds,
call a professional towing service or, truck uses metal cables with hooks then to N.
if you belong to one, an organization on the ends. These hooks go around Turn off the engine.
that provides roadside assistance. parts of the frame or suspension and Release the parking brake.
Never tow your vehicle behind the cables lift that end of the vehicle Leave the ignition switch in the
another vehicle with just a rope or off the ground. Your vehicles ACCESSORY (I) position so the
chain. It is very dangerous. suspension and body can be steering wheel does not lock.
seriously damaged. This method of
There are three popular types of towing is unacceptable.
professional towing equipment.
If your vehicle cannot be transported Improper towing preparation will
Flat-bed Equipment The operator by flat-bed, it should be towed by damage the transmission. Follow the
loads your vehicle on the back of a wheel-lift equipment with the front above procedure exactly. If you
truck. This is the best way to wheels off the ground. If, due to cannot shift the transmission or start
transport your vehicle. damage, your vehicle must be towed the engine (automatic transmission),
with the front wheels on the ground, your vehicle must be transported
Wheel-lift Equipment The tow do the following. with the front wheels off the ground.
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tyres (front or rear) and Manual Transmission With the front wheels on the ground,
lift them off the ground. The other Release the parking brake. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
two tyres remain on the ground. Shift the transmission to neutral. than 80 km (50 miles), and keep the
This is an acceptable way to tow Automatic transmission (CVT) speed below 55 km/h (35 mph).
your vehicle. Start the engine.
Press on the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever through all its
positions.